JP7430932B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that transitions to a stopped state.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that enter a stopped state in which no games can be played when a predetermined opportunity is met. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that shifts to a stopped state when a bonus ends.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-297575

In the conventional technology, the inconvenience of excessive profits being given to players at once could not be sufficiently suppressed. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present invention aims to suppress the above disadvantages.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a first storage area that stores a first control program serving as a gaming control program for controlling the progress of the game, and a second storage area that is different from the gaming control program. a second storage area that stores a control program; a first storage area that is referenced and updated by the first control program but not updated by the second control program; a second storage area that is not updated by the first control program; a main control means capable of executing the first control program and the second control program; A gaming machine comprising a symbol display means for stopping and displaying a symbol combination, and a stop operation means operated by a player to stop the display, wherein the main control means uses the game value by processing a first control program. A game start control that starts a game that has been selected, a winning area determination control that determines one of a plurality of types of winning areas, and a symbol variation control that stops and displays symbol combinations according to the winning area and the mode of the stop operation. , a game value granting control that allows a game value to be given corresponding to the symbol combination, and a replay setting that allows the next game to be started without using the game value when the symbol combination for replay is stopped and displayed. control , and a game stop control that moves the game machine to a stopped state in which no games can be played. Through the processing of the second control program, the game value used and the game value given in each game can be determined. update control that allows the specific information stored in the second storage area to be updated after the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and determines whether the specific information has reached a predetermined threshold value. determination control that executes a determination process; stop flag storage control that stores a stop flag that triggers the gaming machine to enter a stopped state in a second storage area when it is determined that the specific information has reached a threshold; The update control is executed in games other than those in which the symbol combinations for replaying are stopped and displayed, while the update control is omitted in games in which the symbol combinations for replaying are stopped and displayed, and the determination control is executed in the games in which the symbol combinations for replaying are stopped and displayed. While symbol combinations are executed in games other than games that are stopped and displayed , symbol combinations for replaying are omitted in games that are stopped and displayed. After calling the second control program stored in the second storage area by the program, executing the process of the second control program, and executing update control, determination control, and stop flag storage control by the process of the second control program, Returning to the first control program, the first control program executes game stop control when the stop flag is stored, and executes the first control program when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied; Thereafter, the first control program calls the second control program stored in the second storage area, the second control program initializes the stop flag in the second storage area, and the initialization condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. If not, execute the first control program, then call the second control program stored in the second storage area by the first control program, and initialize the specific information in the second storage area by the second control program. At the same time, it is characterized in that a stop flag can be maintained.

According to the present invention, the inconvenience of excessive profits being given to players at once can be suppressed.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing each symbol arranged on each reel. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a symbol display area. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area lottery table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol combination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an expected acquisition value. It is a figure for explaining the transition of the ball release state. FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram of an instruction determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining commands sent from the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each display information. It is a conceptual diagram of a notification effect determination table. It is a figure for explaining the ball release state which shifts from a non-advantageous area. It is a diagram for explaining a game enabled state and a game stopped state. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each process executed in a complete state. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each image displayed in each state. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the MY counter is initialized. FIG. 6 is a mock diagram of each image in a pre-notification state. It is a simulated diagram of each image in a complete state. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining each occasion when each piece of information is cleared. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining when each piece of information is cleared. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a period during which advance notification is performed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which advance notification is performed. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining signals and commands transmitted to the outside. It is a flowchart of the starting process of main CPU. It is a flowchart of game control processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the completion determination process of main CPU. It is a flowchart of abnormality determination processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing of main CPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a storage area of a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each process including a main CPU call process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining details of initialization processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of processing during a non-advantageous period by the main CPU. It is a flow chart of advantageous section control processing of main CPU. 12 is a flowchart of sub-activation processing of a sub-CPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each control mode of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of each production processing of sub CPU. It is a figure for explaining a modification. It is a figure for explaining another modification.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, the present invention will be explained in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Structure of gaming machine>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. A player plays a game on the gaming machine 1 using gaming media (for example, medals or game balls). In this embodiment, a gaming machine 1 (pachislot machine) in which medals are used as gaming media is illustrated. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which electrically stored points are used as the game medium (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-116297).

The gaming machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet having an opening on the front side (player side) and a front door 3. The cabinet is provided with a hinge mechanism. The front door 3 is pivotally supported by a hinge mechanism so that the opening of the cabinet can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of (14 in the example of FIG. 1) housing lamps 5 are provided on the peripheral edge side of the front door 3. Each housing lamp 5 is composed of, for example, a light emitting body such as a light emitting diode, and a light-transmitting lens that covers the light emitting body. The housing lamp 5 emits light in a manner corresponding to each performance in the gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a waist panel 6. On the waist panel 6, the name of the gaming machine 1 and the like are drawn. Furthermore, a saucer unit 7 for storing medals is provided below the waist panel 6. The tray unit 7 is provided so that the player can freely take out the stored medals.

The front door 3 is provided with a medal insertion section 8 having an opening into which medals are inserted, and a medal payout opening 9 through which medals from inside the gaming machine 1 are discharged. When a specified number (3 medals) of medals are inserted from the medal input unit 8, the game can be started. The prescribed number of coins is set according to the state of the game. The medals discharged from the medal payout port 9 are stored in the tray unit 7.

A panel 10 is provided on the center side of the front of the front door 3. A substantially rectangular display window 11 is formed in the center of the panel 10 . From the display window 11, a plurality of reels 12 (12L, 12C, 12R) inside the cabinet can be visually recognized.

Each reel 12 includes a substantially cylindrical drum portion and a band-shaped sheet member attached to the outer peripheral surface of the drum portion. The sheet member of the reel 12 is transparent and has a plurality of types of symbols drawn on it. Each reel 12 is rotatably provided and arranged horizontally adjacent to each other. Specifically, each reel 12 is arranged so that the rotation axis is located on the same straight line. A stepping motor 101 (101L, 101C, 101R) is provided on each of the reels 12 (not shown), and each reel 12 is rotated by each stepping motor 101.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the symbols arranged on each reel 12 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer periphery of each of the plurality of reels 12 is divided into 20 pieces. As shown in FIG. 2, one symbol is drawn on each frame. In this embodiment, the Nth frame from the bottom of the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 2 (N is an integer from numeric value "0" to numeric value "19") may be described as symbol position "N". As shown in FIG. 2, a replay symbol, a bell symbol, a cherry 1 symbol, a cherry 2 symbol, a watermelon symbol, a seven symbol, a BAR 1 symbol, a BAR 2 symbol, a blank 1 symbol, and a blank 2 symbol are arranged on each reel 12.

Specifically, the replay symbols are symbol positions "1", "6", "11", "16" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "3", "8", "13", "18" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol positions "1", "6", "11", "16" on the left reel 12L, and on the right The symbols are arranged at symbol positions "3", "8", "13", and "18" on the reel 12R. The bell symbols are located at symbol positions "0," "5," "10," and "15" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "4," "9," "14," and "19" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol positions on the right reel 12R. They are arranged as "4", "9", "14", and "19". The Cherry 1 symbol is arranged at symbol position "18" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "0", "5", "10", "15" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "11" on the right reel 12R. . The cherry 2 symbols are arranged at symbol position "3" on the left reel 12L and symbol position "1" on the right reel 12R. The watermelon symbols are located at symbol positions "4", "9", "13", "14", and "19" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "1", "11", and "16" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol positions on the right reel 12R. They are arranged as "0", "5", "10", and "15". The blank 1 symbols are arranged at symbol position "12" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "12" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol positions "12" and "17" on the right reel 12R. The blank 2 symbols are arranged at symbol position "2" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "2" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "2" on the right reel 12R. The BAR1 symbols are arranged at symbol position "7" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "7" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "7" on the right reel 12R. The BAR2 symbols are arranged at symbol position "17" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "17" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "16" on the right reel 12R. The seven symbols are arranged at symbol position "8" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "6" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "6" on the right reel 12R.

In addition, in FIG. 2, each pattern is shown in a color different from the actual color of each pattern. Furthermore, each symbol on each reel 12 is generally distinguishable by the player even when the reel 12 is rotating. Therefore, the player can perform an operation (so-called eye press) to stop the reels 12 at the timing when a specific symbol passes within the display window 11. A symbol arrangement table (not shown) indicating the arrangement of symbols on each reel 12 is stored in the main ROM 302.

Three symbols are stopped and displayed on each reel 12 in the display window 11 of the front door 3 shown in FIG. That is, when all the reels 12 are stopped, a total of nine symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 11. In this embodiment, the area in which each symbol is displayed is referred to as a "design display area."

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the symbol display area. As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display area includes each unit area U (L, C, R). One symbol is displayed in each unit area U. Each unit area U includes each unit area UL where each symbol on the left reel 12L is displayed, each unit area UC where each symbol on the middle reel 12C is displayed, and each unit where each symbol on the right reel 12R is displayed. The area UR is configured to include the area UR. Each unit area UL includes a unit area UL1 located at the upper level, a unit area UL2 located at the middle level, and a unit area UL3 located at the lower level. Furthermore, each unit area UC includes a unit area UC1 located in the upper tier, a unit area UC2 located in the middle tier, and a unit area UC3 located in the lower tier, and each unit area UR includes a unit area UR1 located in the upper tier and a unit area UC3 located in the middle tier. It includes a unit area UR2 located at , and a unit area UR3 located at the lower level.

When a specified number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion section 8, a valid line is set. The effective line is constituted by any one unit area U of the reel 12L, any one unit area U of the reel 12C, and any one unit area U of the reel 12R among each unit area U. It is an area. The effective line in this embodiment is a line that connects the unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the unit area UR2 of the reel 12R.

The combination of symbols as a result of the game is stopped and displayed on the active line. When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped on the active line, a profit is given to the player according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, if a combination of winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line, a medal is awarded to the player. Further, when a combination of symbols related to replaying is stopped and displayed on the active line, the player is granted the right to replay. Specifically, if a combination of symbols related to a replay is displayed in the current game, the next game can be started without the need to insert medals. The combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is determined for each game according to the result of an internal lottery process to be described later.

In the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the upper unit area UC1 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an "upper line". Similarly, the line connecting the middle unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the middle unit area UR2 of the reel 12R (the effective line in this embodiment) may be referred to as the "middle line". be. Further, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the lower unit area UC3 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a "lower line". Further, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an "upward right line". Similarly, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a "downward right line".

Each reel 12 is also provided with a backlight (not shown) that illuminates the sheet member of the reel 12 from inside. Specifically, each reel 12 includes a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the upper line of the reel 12, a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the middle line, and a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the lower line. provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 includes an input possible indicator lamp 13, a BET lamp 14 (14a, 14b, 14c), a start lamp 15, an instruction indicator 16, a stored coins indicator 17, a replay indicator lamp 18, A plurality of indicators (hereinafter referred to as "indicators ML") including a wait lamp 19 and a stop lamp 20 are provided. Each lamp of the display device ML is controlled by a main CPU 301, which will be described later.

The insertable indicator lamp 13 notifies whether or not it is possible to accept medals from the medal inserter 8. The BET lamp 14 displays the number of bet medals. Further, the BET lamp 14 includes a one lamp 14a, a two lamp 14b, and a three lamp 14c. When one bet medal is set, the one-sheet lamp 14a lights up, and when two bet medals are set, the one-sheet lamp 14a and the two-sheet lamp 14b are lit, and three bet medals are set. Then, the single lamp 14a, double lamp 14b, and triple lamp 14c are turned on. The start lamp 15 informs whether or not it is possible to accept a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24, which will be described later).

The instruction display 16 is controlled by the main CPU 301 and displays instruction information for instructing the operation mode (pressing order) of the stop button 25. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information in each game during the instruction period. Further, the instruction display 16 displays the number of medals to be awarded to the player when the symbol combination related to the winning combination is displayed on the active line. For example, when the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is stopped and displayed on the active line, eight medals are awarded to the player and the instruction display 16 displays the number "8".

The number of medals awarded to a player can be electrically stored (stored) in the gaming machine 1 (main RAM 303, which will be described later). In this embodiment, the number of stored medals is referred to as the "number of credits." The number of credits is added when medals are awarded as a result of a game. Further, the number of credits is added when further medals are inserted from the medal insertion section 8 in a state in which a prescribed number of bet medals have been inserted. The stored number display 17 displays the number of credits. Specifically, the stored number display 17 variably displays a number from "0" to a number "50" which is the upper limit of the number of credits, depending on the number of stored credits.

The replay indicator lamp 18 notifies that the replay is in progress. Specifically, the regame display lamp 18 lights up from the time the symbol combination related to the replay in the current game is stopped and displayed on the active line until the next game ends. By lighting up the replay indicator lamp 18, the player is notified that the next game start operation is possible without using medals. The wait lamp 19 lights up during a wait period from when a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24 described later) is performed until rotation of each reel 12 is started. The wait period is provided to increase the average length of time required for one game to a predetermined value (approximately 4.1 seconds) or more. The stoppage lamp 20 notifies the user that the game is in a stoppage state where the game is not possible.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 includes a 1BET button 21, a MAX-BET button 22, a settlement button 23, a start lever 24, a plurality of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R), a production button 26, and a direction specification button. A plurality of operation sections including buttons 27 are provided. Each operation unit is operated by a player.

The 1BET button 21 is operated when setting one bet medal using stored medals. The MAX-BET button 22 is operated when setting a specified number of bet medals using stored medals. The settlement button 23 is operated when settling the medals and bet medals stored as the number of credits. When the settlement button 23 is operated, medals equal to the total number of credits and bet medals are paid out from the medal payout port 9. In this embodiment, the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 or the 1BET button 21 may be referred to as a BET operation.

The start lever 24 is operated by the player when starting the game. The player can instruct the start of the game by performing a start operation on the start lever 24 in a state where the game can be started. The start lever 24 of this embodiment is tiltable in any direction of 360 degrees from a state substantially perpendicular to the front door 3. Further, the grip portion of the start lever 24 is made of a translucent resin, and has a built-in lamp 42 for lever effect. The lever effect lamp 42 lights up in a predetermined effect.

The stop button 25 is operated by the player to stop the reels 12. Further, the stop button 25 includes a stop button 25L, a stop button 25C, and a stop button 25R. The stop button 25L corresponds to the reel 12L, the stop button 25C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the stop button 25R corresponds to the reel 12R. When the stop button 25 corresponding to the reel 12 is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation") while the reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 stops (normal stop, pseudo stop).

Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the first stop operation in each game will be referred to as the first stop operation. Similarly, the second stop operation is called a second stop operation, and the third stop operation is called a third stop operation. Furthermore, the control by which the gaming machine 1 (main CPU 301 described later) stops the reels 12 based on the first stop operation is referred to as first stop control. Similarly, the stop control of the reel 12 based on the second stop operation is called second stop control, and the stop control of the reel 12 based on the third stop operation is called third stop control. Further, the symbol position of the reel 12 located on the middle line of the display window 11 at the time when the stop operation is performed is referred to as the stop operation position. The symbol position located on the middle line during the rotation of each reel 12 is stored in the symbol counter, and the symbol position on the symbol counter at the time of the stop operation is acquired as the stop operation position. The symbol counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example.

When all the reels 12 are stopped, the combination of symbols resulting from the game is displayed on the active line, and the game ends. When the game starts, each reel 12 accelerates to a constant rotation speed. During a period in which each reel 12 is at a constant rotational speed (a period in which the reels 12 are rotating steadily), a stop operation can be performed to stop and display the game result on the active line. On the other hand, during the acceleration period from when each reel 12 starts rotating until it rotates steadily, a stop operation for displaying the game result is not accepted even if the reel 12 is rotating.

The stop button 25 of this embodiment can be controlled into multiple types of display modes. Specifically, each stop button 25 is provided with a light emitting body (for example, an LED) capable of emitting red, blue, and green light. During the period in which the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits red light, the stop button 25 appears to emit red light. Similarly, during a period when the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits blue light, the stop button 25 appears to emit blue light, and during a period when the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits green light, the stop button 25 appears to emit green light. It appears to emit light. The stop button 25 emits green light when a specific setting value (setting value "1") is set among the setting values described below. According to the above configuration, it can be understood from the aspect of the stop button 25 that a specific setting value has been set. Note that the mode of the stop button 25 is not limited to the above example.

The performance button 26 is operated by the player when giving instructions regarding the performance. For example, the player can instruct execution of a specific performance by operating the performance button 26. That is, the particular performance is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 26 (trigger). Note that it is also possible to make the MAX-BET button 22 have the function of the production button 26. According to the above configuration, the effect button 26 is omitted, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, if the performance button 26 is operated during the period from the end of the current game until the bet medals are inserted to start the next game (hereinafter referred to as "non-gaming period"), the menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

The operation of the effect button 26 is detected by the effect button switch 26SW. For example, when the effect button 26 is not pressed, the effect button switch 26SW outputs an OFF signal. On the other hand, when the production button 26 is pressed, the production button switch 26SW outputs an ON signal. During the non-gaming period, when the performance button switch 26SW changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

The direction designation button 27 is operated by the player, for example, when a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The direction designation button 27 includes an upper button, a lower button, a right button, and a left button. For example, by operating the direction designation button 27, a cursor for designating an option displayed on the menu image can be moved. Specifically, when the upper button is operated, the cursor within the menu image moves upward. Similarly, when the down button is operated, the cursor moves downward, when the right button is operated, the cursor moves to the right, and when the left button is operated, the cursor moves to the left.

During the non-gaming period, when the direction designation button 27 is operated, the master volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed. Further, during the non-gaming period, when the direction designation button 27 is operated appropriately, the production control mode of the gaming machine 1 can be changed. There are three types of production control modes in this embodiment: enjoy mode, normal mode, and simple mode. In each of the above performance control modes, the execution frequency of the performance is different. Specifically, in the enjoyment mode, the performance is most easily executed among the performance control modes. Furthermore, in the simple mode, it is the least likely to perform the effect among the effect control modes. In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the production control mode is initialized to the normal mode. The same applies when a clear operation is executed and when a setting change operation is executed. However, when the reset operation is executed, the production control mode is not initialized (maintained).

As shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the above-mentioned display ML (start lamp 15, etc.), the panel 10 of the front door 3 includes a plurality of performance lamps 28 (28a to 28e) and a plurality of stop operation order display lamps 29. (29L, 29C, 29R) are provided. Each lamp of the display ML is controlled by the main CPU 301, whereas each production lamp 28 and each stop operation order display lamp 29 is controlled by a sub CPU 412, which will be described later. Among the plurality of performance lamps 28, the performance lamp 28a and the performance lamp 28b are provided on the left side of the display window 11 when viewed from the front, and the performance lamps 28c to 28e are provided on the right side of the display window 11 when viewed from the front. established in Each performance lamp 28 notifies the current game status and the like.

Each stop operation order display lamp 29 is provided in a region of the panel 10 below the display window 11, and informs the order of operations of each stop button 25. As shown in FIG. 1, a liquid crystal display device 30 for displaying various images is provided above the display window 11 of the front door 3. The liquid crystal display device 30 displays moving images and still images in accordance with the effects executed by the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 30 reports information related to the result of an internal lottery process to be described later, information indicating the state of the balls, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 1, upper lamps 35 (L, R) are provided on the upper end side of the front door 3. The upper lamp 35 includes, for example, a light emitting diode that can emit light in each color (blue, yellow, green, red, etc.) and a lens that covers the light emitting diode. For example, when a winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the upper lamp 35 emits light in a manner (color) corresponding to the winning combination. Further, the upper lamp 35 emits light in a manner corresponding to each performance.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with speakers 31 (31L, 31R) and speakers 32 (32L, 32R). The speaker 31 is provided on the lower end side of the front door 3, and includes a speaker 31L attached to the left side and a speaker 31R attached to the right side when viewed from the player side. Further, the speaker 32 is provided on the upper end side of the front door 3, and includes a speaker 32L attached to the left side when viewed from the player side and a speaker 32R attached to the right side. The speakers 31 and 32 output sounds (music, sounds, and sound effects) according to the performance. For example, the speakers 31 and 32 output sounds related to the effects performed on the liquid crystal display device 30, the effect lamp 28, the housing lamp 5, the stop operation order display lamp 29, or the lever effect lamp 42. do. The speakers 31 and 32 are attached to the back surface of the front door 3, and a plurality of sound emitting holes are formed on the surface of the front door 3 at positions corresponding to the speakers 31 and 32, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a return button 33. The return button 33 is operated to eliminate medal clogging in the medal flow path inside the gaming machine 1. By operating the return button 33, the medals stuck in the medal flow path are discharged from the medal payout port 9.

The front door 3 is provided with a locking device 4 in which a keyhole is formed. The front door 3 is locked by the locking device 4 of the front door 3 engaging with a locking piece (not shown) of the cabinet. As shown in FIG. 1, the keyhole of the locking device 4 is located at the front of the front door 3, into which a key (not shown) for unlocking the front door 3 can be inserted. As will be described later, various operation units (eg, setting change button 37) are provided inside the cabinet. Each operating section inside the cabinet is operated by a person in charge of the key that unlocks the front door 3 (for example, a clerk at the gaming parlor where the gaming machine 1 is installed).

A main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet. Specifically, the main control board 300 is housed in a transparent board case and attached to the back plate of the cabinet. Various electronic components including a main CPU 301, which will be described later, are mounted on the main control board 300. Further, the main control board 300 is electrically connected to various boards including a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a sub-control board 400, and a power supply board 500, which will be described later, via connectors (not shown). Note that the various substrates described above may be composed of a single substrate or may be composed of a plurality of substrates.

A setting display section 36 and a setting change button 37 are provided inside the cabinet. The setting display section 36 displays setting values of the gaming machine 1. The set value is a numerical value related to the ball payout rate of the gaming machine 1, and in each game, various lottery draws are performed with a probability according to the set value. For example, the set value is set from "1" to "6", and the set value "6" has the highest ball payout rate. In this embodiment, when the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole and rotated, the setting display section 36 displays the setting value.

The setting change button 37 is operated when changing the numerical value on the setting display section 36. The setting display section 36 increments and displays a numerical value by 1 each time the setting change button 37 is operated. When the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display section 36, the numerical value displayed on the setting display section 36 at the time of the operation is stored as the setting value.

However, in this embodiment, the numbers "0", "1", "2", "4", "5", and "6" are displayed on the setting display section 36. Specifically, when the power is turned on while the setting change key is rotated, the setting value change process is started and the setting change mode is entered. In the setting change mode, if the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the number "0" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "1" is set. Furthermore, if the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the number "1" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "2" is set. Further, if the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the number "2" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "3" is set.

Similarly, if the start lever 24 is operated during a period when the number "4" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "4" is set, and during a period during which the number "5" is displayed on the setting display section 36. When the start lever 24 is operated during the period when the start lever 24 is operated, the set value "5" is set, and when the start lever 24 is operated during the period when the number "6" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "6" is set. be done. When the setting value is set, the setting change mode ends, information including the gaming state (gaming state flag) and the ball output state (ball output state flag) is initialized, and the game becomes executable. Note that if the power is turned on without rotating the setting key to the operating position, the setting value changing process will not be executed. In the above case, various types of information including the game status flag and the ball output status flag when the power is turned off are retained even after the power is turned on. For the sake of explanation, the following describes the power-on operation with the setting key rotated to the operating position, the operation of the setting change button 37, the operation of the start lever 24 to set the setting value, and the operation of the setting key to the non-operating position. A combination of operations for returning to ``settings'' may be simply referred to as a "settings changing operation."

Further, when the setting key is operated to the operating position with the power already turned on, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode, similar to the setting change mode, it is impossible to proceed with the game, and the setting value set in the setting change process is displayed on the setting display section 36. However, settings cannot be changed in setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode, a message indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Note that, from the viewpoint of preventing others from secretly viewing the setting values, a configuration in which the setting values are not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the setting confirmation mode is preferable. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the setting value may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. When the setting key is operated to the non-operating position, the setting confirmation mode ends.

A sub-control board 400 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The sub-control board 400 includes various boards including a production control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430.

A power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet. The power supply device 510 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter (both not shown), generates a DC voltage from an AC voltage supplied from outside the gaming machine 1, and generates multiple types of DC voltage from the generated DC voltage. Generates DC voltage. For example, the power supply device 510 supplies a 32V DC voltage used to drive a motor and a solenoid, a 12V DC voltage supplied to the liquid crystal display device 30, and a 5V DC voltage supplied to an electronic circuit board (for example, the main control board 300). generates a DC voltage of

The power supply device 510 is provided with a power button 511 and a clear button 512. When the power button 511 is operated to the ON state, power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power button 511 is operated to the OFF state, the power is cut off. The clear button 512 is operated to clear the ball-out state and the like. Specifically, when the clear button is operated, a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303, which will be described later, is cleared to the initial value.

Specifically, when the clear button 512 is operated, clear processing is executed. Specifically, the clearing process is executed on the condition that the clear button 512 is pressed when the power is turned on. When the clearing process is executed, all information including the gaming state (gaming state flag) and ball dispensing state (ball dispensing state flag) is initialized, as in the case of transitioning to the setting change mode. Hereinafter, the combination of the operation of the clear button 512 and the power-on operation for executing the clear process may be simply referred to as a "clear operation".

The main control board 300 is provided with various electronic components. Specifically, various electronic components including a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, a setting display section 36, and a main display 40 are mounted on the main control board 300. The connector is used to electrically connect the main control board 300 and other control devices.

<Game machine circuit>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 has been described above. Below, the functions of each circuit included in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 4. As shown in FIG. 4, the gaming machine 1 includes a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a main control board 300, a sub-control board 400, and a power supply board 500.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I/F (interface) circuit 305. Note that the main CPU 301, main ROM 302, and main RAM 303 may be provided as separate electronic devices, or may be provided as a one-chip microcomputer in which each element is integrally configured.

The main ROM 302 nonvolatilely stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301 and various data (for example, a winning area lottery table). The main RAM 303 stores various data used in each process executed by the main CPU 301.

The main CPU 301 reads a control program stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined processing in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby controlling the sub-control board 400, each reel 12, the hopper 520 that pays out medals, and the display ML. Control various devices including.

A random number generator 304 generates a random number R1 used in an internal lottery process to be described later. The random number generator 304 of this embodiment includes a counter circuit, a sampling circuit, and a pulse generation circuit (all not shown), and generates hardware random numbers. Specifically, the pulse generation circuit outputs a signal to the counter circuit at a predetermined period. The numerical value of the counter circuit is incremented by "1" every time a signal is input from the pulse generating circuit. The sampling circuit stores the numerical value of the counter circuit as a random value R1 when the player performs a game start operation. The random number R1 is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "65535". Note that a software random number may be employed as the random value R1.

In this embodiment, a random number R2 is generated in addition to the random number R1. The random number R2 is a software random number obtained from a register built into the main CPU 301, and is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "255". As will be described later, the random number R2 is used in the spinning performance determination process. In the above-described round performance determination process, the type of round performance (pseudo game) is determined by lottery. In the spinning performance, each reel 12 is controlled in a manner different from that in a normal game. The main CPU 301 also generates a random number R3. The random number R3 is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "255". The random number R3 is used in battle victory determination processing, etc., which will be described later.

The I/F circuit 305 inputs signals from each switch SW (eg, start switch 24SW) of various operation units (eg, start lever 24) and signals from each sensor SE (eg, medal sensor 34SE) to the main CPU 301. The signals from each switch SW and each sensor SE are high level or low level signals. In addition, in this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a signal at a first level (high level or low level) is expressed as an ON signal, and a signal at a second level (low level or high level) is expressed as an OFF signal. do. Whether the first level, which is the ON signal, is high level or low level is set depending on the type of switch SW or sensor SE. Further, the fact that an ON signal (OFF signal) is output from the switch SW may be described as "the switch SW is in the ON state (OFF state)".

The I/F circuit 305 outputs various signals for driving the display ML, the hopper 520, and each reel 12 to the outside of the main control board 300. Further, the I/F circuit 305 outputs various commands to the sub-control board 400. Note that in order to prevent unauthorized commands from being input to the main control board, commands from the sub-control board 400 are not received by the main control board 300.

A signal from the main control board 300 is input to the reel board 100. The reel board 100 outputs drive pulses to each reel 12 in response to signals from the main control board 300. Each stepping motor 101 of each reel 12 is driven according to a drive pulse from the reel board 100.

The stepping motor 101 includes a plurality of (four) coils. The combination of coils to be excited among the coils is sequentially switched each time a drive pulse is input from the reel board 100, and each reel 12 is rotated by sequentially switching the combination of coils to be excited. Specifically, when the combination of excited coils of the stepping motor 101 is switched once, the reel 12 rotates by a predetermined angle. For example, when a pulse is applied 24 times, the reel 12 rotates by an angle corresponding to one frame (unit area U), and when a pulse is applied 504 times, the reel 12 rotates once. In the above configuration, the shorter the time interval at which drive pulses are applied, the faster the rotational speed of the reel 12 becomes.

ON/OFF signals from the plurality of reel sensors 111 (111L, 111C, 111R) are input to the main control board 300 via the reel board 100. Among the reel sensors 111, the reel sensor 111L corresponds to the reel 12L, the reel sensor 111C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the reel sensor 111R corresponds to the reel 12R. Each reel sensor 111 outputs an ON signal when the rotation angle of the corresponding reel 12 is at the reference position. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of each reel 12 is other than the reference position, each reel sensor 111 outputs an OFF signal. The main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 can determine the rotation angle of each reel 12 from the signals from each reel sensor 111 and the number of times a drive pulse is output to each stepping motor 101.

Relay board 200 relays signals from main control board 300 to display device ML. Display device ML is driven according to a signal output from main control board 300. Further, the relay board 200 relays ON/OFF signals inputted to the main control board 300 from each sensor (such as a start switch 24SW described later) that detects the operation of each operation unit (such as the start lever 24). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the relay board 200 relays ON/OFF signals from the 1BET switch 21SW, MAX-BET switch 22SW, settlement switch 23SW, start switch 24SW, stop switch 25SW, and medal sensor 34SE. do. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the power supply board 500 relays ON/OFF signals of various sensors or switches including the clear switch 512SE and the payout sensor 112SE.

The 1BET switch 21SW detects the operation of the 1BET button 21 by the player. Further, the ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input, the main CPU 301 adds one medal to the bet medals.

The MAX-BET switch 22SW detects the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 by the player. Further, the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input, the main CPU 301 sets a specified number of medals as bet medals.

The settlement switch 23SW detects the operation of the settlement button 23 by the player. The ON signal from the payment switch 23SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200.

When an ON signal from the payment switch 23SW is input, or when a winning combination of symbols is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 outputs a hopper drive signal to the hopper 520. The hopper drive signal is input from the main control board 300 to the hopper 520 via the power supply board 500. The hopper 520 pays out medals when a hopper drive signal is input.

The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal to the main control board 300 every time one medal is paid out from the hopper 520. Specifically, the payout sensor 112SE is provided at a position where medals passing through the ejection slit 521b of the hopper 520 are detected. The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal when detecting a medal. The payout signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. The main CPU 301 can determine the number of medals that have been paid out by counting the number of times that the payout signal has been input.

The power switch 511SW is switched to an ON state or an OFF state by operating the power button 511. When the power switch 511SW is in the ON state, power is supplied from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1, and when the power switch 511SW is in the OFF state, the power from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. The power supply device 510 generates a DC voltage when supplied with power. The DC voltage generated by the power supply device 510 is supplied to various devices including the hopper 520 via the power supply board 500.

Clear switch 512SW is provided in power supply device 510, and outputs a clear signal to main control board 300 when clear button 512 is operated. The clear signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. When the main CPU 301 is powered on, it determines whether or not a clear signal has been received, and if the clear signal has been received, it executes clear processing. In the clearing process, a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303 is initialized.

The reset switch 4SW is provided in the locking device 4. Specifically, when a key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking device 4 and the key is rotated to the right, the front door 3 is unlocked, and when the key is rotated to the left, the reset switch 4SW is turned on. . When the reset switch 4SW is turned on, a reset signal is input to the main CPU 301. The main CPU 301 executes a reset process when a reset signal is input. In the reset process, a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303 is initialized, and, for example, a predetermined abnormality detection state is canceled. Although the above clearing process is executed when the power is turned on, the reset process can also be executed after the power is turned on. Hereinafter, an operation for executing a reset process may be referred to as a "reset operation".

The front door switch 3SW detects that the front door 3 is opened. Specifically, when the front door 3 is opened, the front door switch 3SW is turned on, and a front door open signal is input to the main CPU 301. When the front door open signal is input, the main CPU 301 enters a door abnormality detection state. Specifically, when the front door open signal is input, the main CPU 301 changes the abnormality detection flag Fed to the ON state. Door abnormality is notified during the period when the abnormality detection flag Fed is in the ON state. In this embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode on the condition that the front door open signal is input. With the above configuration, fraudulent acts such as operating the setting key from the outside to shift to the setting change mode with the front door 3 closed are suppressed.

The setting change switch 37SW shown in FIG. 4 detects the operation of the setting change button 37. The ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300. When the ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input, the main CPU 301 updates the display on the setting display section 36. In addition, if an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW during a period in which the setting value is not displayed on the setting display section 36, the main CPU 301 causes the storage number display 16 to display the specified accessories ratio (described later). . The medal sensor 34SE detects medals inserted from the medal insertion section 8.

ON/OFF signals from a plurality of stop switches 25SW (25SWL, 25SWC, 25SWR) are input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. Among the stop switches 25SW, the stop switch 25SWL corresponds to the stop button 25L, the stop switch 25SWC corresponds to the stop button 25C, and the stop switch 25SWR corresponds to the stop button 25R. The main CPU 301 controls the stop of the reel 12 corresponding to the stop switch 25SW to which the ON signal is input. Specifically, when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWL, the reel 12L is controlled to stop. Similarly, the main CPU 301 controls the reel 12C to stop when the ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWC, and controls the reel 12R to stop when the ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWR.

The start switch 24SW detects the operation of the start lever 24 by the player. The ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. For example, the main CPU 301 controls each stepping motor 101 to rotate each reel 12 when an ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input. Further, an ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300.

The start switch 24SW of this embodiment is configured to be able to detect the direction in which the start lever 24 is operated. Specifically, the start switch 24SW can individually detect any one of a push-up operation to push up the start lever 24, a push-down operation to push it down, a right-hand operation to push it to the right, and a left-hand operation to push it to the left, as viewed from the player's side. be. For example, the start switch 24SW is divided into a start switch 24SWU that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pressed up, a start switch 24SWD that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pressed down, and a start switch 24SWD that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pressed down. It is composed of a plurality of sensors including a start switch 24SWR that outputs a signal and a start switch 24SWL that outputs an ON signal when operated on the left side. According to the above configuration, it is possible to make different effects performed depending on, for example, when the start lever 24 is pressed down and when it is pushed up.

The main CPU 301 calculates various types of game information (continuous combination ratio, role object ratio, most recent successive role ratio, most recent role object ratio, instruction-inclusive role object ratio, bonus game ratio) according to the progress of the game, and calculates the game information. Display information corresponding to the main display 40 is displayed. The display information includes each identification information corresponding to each game information and ratio information indicating the size of the game information.

The main display 40 includes a first display section 40X and a second display section 40Y. The first display section 40X displays the above-mentioned identification information. Further, the second display section 40Y displays the above-mentioned ratio information. The first display section 40X is composed of two 7-segment displays, and the second display section 40Y is composed of two 7-segment displays. The main display 40 starts displaying display information when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and continues to display the display information thereafter until the power is turned off. As will be described in detail later, the main display 40 displays a plurality of pieces of display information corresponding to various types of game information. Each piece of display information is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (about 5 seconds).

<Sub control board>
The sub-control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 30, the speakers (31, 32), and each lamp (for example, the performance lamp 28). As shown in FIG. 4, the sub-control board 400 is composed of a plurality of boards including a production control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430. The sub-control board 400 also includes various sensors including a production button switch 26SW and a direction specifying switch 27SW, a housing lamp 5, a production lamp 28, a stop operation order display lamp 29, a lever production lamp 42, and an upper part. Various lamps including lamp 35 are electrically connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a volume adjustment switch 44 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 400. The volume adjustment switch 44 is used to adjust the master volume of the gaming machine 1. As the volume adjustment switch 44, for example, a dip switch is suitably employed. As described above, the master volume can also be adjusted by operating the direction designation button 27. That is, the master volume is adjusted by operating either the direction designation button 27 or the volume adjustment switch 44.

In this embodiment, the master volume that can be adjusted is different depending on whether the direction designation button 27 is operated or the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated. Specifically, when the direction designation button 27 is operated, the master volume can be adjusted to any value from numerical value "1" to numerical value "5" (5 levels). On the other hand, when the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated, the master volume can be adjusted to any one of numerical value "1", numerical value "3", and numerical value "5" (three levels). Note that the adjustable master volume may be the same when the direction designation button 27 is operated and when the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated.

The production control board 410 is configured to include an I/F circuit 411, a sub CPU 412, a sub ROM 413, and a sub RAM 414, as shown in FIG. The effect control board 410 (sub CPU 412) controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5, the effect lamp 28, the stop operation order display lamp 29, and the lever effect lamp 42, and the sound board 430. Further, the effect control board 410 gives a command to the image control board 420 to cause the liquid crystal display device 30 to display each image.

The sub ROM 413 stores a control program executed by the sub CPU 412 and various data. For example, a performance lottery table for determining the type of performance and lamp data indicating flashing patterns of various lamps are stored in the sub ROM 413.

The sub-RAM 414 functions as a work area that volatilely stores various data. The I/F circuit 411 receives commands from the main control board 300 (I/F circuit 305). However, the main control board 300 is configured to be unable to receive commands from the sub control board 400. Commands received by the I/F circuit 411 are supplied to the sub CPU 412. The command received by the I/F circuit 411 is, for example, a display winning combination command indicating the type of winning combination stopped on the active line.

The sub CPU 412 executes the control program stored in the sub ROM 413 and controls various lamps (for example, the housing lamp 5) and the sound board 430 based on each data stored in the sub ROM 413. For example, the sub CPU 412 reads data indicating the blinking pattern of the housing lamp 5 from the sub ROM 413 and causes the housing lamp 5 to blink. Further, the sub CPU 412 generates a random number value R4 used in performance control processing, which will be described later. As the random number R4, for example, a random number in the range 0 to 65535 is preferably employed. Note that the sub ROM 413 may be composed of a single electronic component or may be composed of a plurality of electronic components (storage devices).

The image control board 420 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images in response to commands from the performance control board 410. As shown in FIG. 4, the image control board 420 includes an image control CPU 421, an image control ROM 422, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 423, a CGROM 424, and a VRAM 425.

The image control CPU 421 executes the control program stored in the image control ROM 422 and gives instructions to the VDP 423 according to commands from the production control board 410. The CGROM 424 stores compression-encoded image data (eg, texture data). The VDP 423 includes an image decoder and a drawing circuit (both not shown). When an instruction from the image control CPU 421 is input to the VDP 423, the image decoder reads image data from the CGROM 424 in accordance with the instruction. The image decoder expands (decodes) the called image data and stores it in the RAM 425. The drawing circuit causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images according to the image data stored in the RAM 425. Further, the RAM 425 stores various data generated by each process of the image control CPU 421. The RAM 425 is provided with a command storage area for storing sound control commands to be sent to the sound source IC 431.

The sound board 430 is controlled by the image control CPU 421 and generates an audio signal. The acoustic signal generated by the sound board 430 is supplied to the speakers 31 and 32, and output as sound waves. As shown in FIG. 4, the sound board 430 includes a sound source IC 431 and a sound source ROM 432. The image control CPU 421 controls the sound board 430 (sound source IC 431) in response to commands from the sub CPU 412.

The sound source ROM 432 compresses and stores a plurality of audio data. Each piece of sound data is, for example, data indicating each of the sounds including a music piece in a specific ball release state, a sound that is output every time the player operates the stop button 25, and an error sound that is output in an error state. .

The sound source IC 431 generates an audio signal from the audio data in the sound source ROM 432. Further, the sound source IC 431 includes a decoder, a control register, and an A/D converter (all not shown). The decoder of the sound source IC 431 reads audio data from the sound source ROM 432 in response to instructions from the sub CPU 412 . Further, the decoder of the sound source IC 431 adjusts the volume of the read audio data, and then stores the audio data in the control register. A plurality of pieces of acoustic data are stored in the control register, and each piece of acoustic data stored in the control register is supplied to the A/D converter in the order in which it was stored. The A/D converter generates an acoustic signal from the acoustic data and supplies it to the amplifier 433. The amplifier 433 amplifies the acoustic signal supplied from the sound source IC 431 (A/D converter) and supplies it to the speakers 31 and 32. Note that the CPU that controls the sound source IC 431 may be provided separately from the sub CPU 412 and the image control CPU 421.

<Each data used by the main CPU>
The description of each circuit of the gaming machine 1 is as above. Hereinafter, various data stored in the main ROM 302 will be explained using the drawings.

FIG. 5 is a conceptual diagram of the winning area lottery table. The main CPU 301 determines a winning area using the winning area lottery table and random number value R1 in an internal lottery process to be described later. As shown in FIG. 5, each winning area lottery table is configured to include a plurality of winning areas and each lottery value corresponding to each winning area. In FIG. 5, the name of each winning area is shown. The winning area lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 for each set value (1 to 6).

FIG. 5 illustrates a winning area lottery table that is referred to when the setting value is "1" and a winning area lottery table that is referred to when the setting value is "2". As will be described in detail later, the gameplay when the setting value "1" is set is significantly different from the gameplay when other setting values are set. Specifically, when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of winning for batting order bells (01 to 04) in the non-internal medium state and internal medium state is higher than when other setting values are set. is small, and the probability of winning one common ticket ALL is high.

In the above configuration, the expected medal acquisition value (described later) in the mid-cycle state (relatively unfavorable ball output state), which will be described later, will be the highest at the setting value "1", while the later-described AT state (relatively advantageous ball output state) will be the highest. The expected acquisition value in the ball state) is the lowest at the setting value "1". Therefore, when the set value "1" is set, the gambling nature is significantly reduced compared to when other set values are set. Due to the above circumstances, some players may find the game to be uninteresting, so some administrators of the gaming machine 1 may not set the setting value "1" in principle.

Each winning area of the winning area lottery table specifies each winning combination defined in the winning combination determination table shown in FIG. For example, assume that "Replay 1" with winning area number "01" is determined by internal lottery processing. As shown in FIG. 6, the winning area number "01" specifies the winning combination "Middle Replay", the winning combination "Lower Right Replay", the winning combination "Seven Replay", and the winning combination "BAR Replay 2 to 4". That is, in a game in which the winning area "Replay 1" is won, multiple types of winning combinations are designated in duplicate. The winning combination of symbols specified in the winning area is allowed to stop on the active line.

Each lottery value in the winning area lottery table is subtracted from the random number value R1 in the internal lottery process. Specifically, in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 subtracts each lottery value corresponding to each winning area from the random number value R1 in ascending order of the winning areas. In the internal lottery process, a winning area where the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random number value R1 is a negative number is determined. The probability that a negative number will be obtained when subtracted from the random number R1 increases as the lottery value increases. Therefore, among the winning areas, the winning area with a larger lottery value has a higher probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning area lottery table is configured to include each lottery value for each gaming state. Each gaming state includes a non-internal state, an internal state, and a bonus activation state. In this embodiment, the prescribed number of coins in each gaming state is three in common. Among the gaming states, the non-internal state is entered when a set value is set (changed) or after the bonus operating state ends. Note that when the set value is changed in the internal mode, the internal mode may be maintained.

The internal medium state is a gaming state in which the winning state of the RBB combination is carried over (hereinafter simply referred to as "the RBB combination is carried over"). Specifically, in this embodiment, various winning combinations including the RBB combination are determined for each game. Winning combinations other than the RBB combination are not carried over to the next game, regardless of whether the symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if the symbol combination of the RBB combination is not stopped and displayed in the current game, the RBB combination is carried over to the next and subsequent games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 6, in a game where the winning area "overlapping combination 1" has been determined, in addition to the RBB combination, the winning combinations "chance combinations 1 to 8, left failure combinations 1 to 3, middle failure combinations 1 and 2," The symbol combination "Right Failure Hand" (common 1 card 1) can be stopped and displayed. If the symbol combination of the RBB combination is not stopped and displayed in a game where the above winning area "Overlapping combination 1" has been determined, the RBB combination will be carried over to the next game (transferred to the internal medium state), and the other winning combinations will be transferred to the next game. Does not carry over to gaming. The above internal state is maintained until the bonus operating state is started. Note that the internal medium state of this embodiment includes a game in which the RBB combination is won.

The bonus operating state is entered when the symbol combination related to the RBB combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. The bonus operating state ends when more than 27 medals are paid out. When the bonus operating state ends, the main CPU 301 shifts to a non-internal state. In each game in the bonus operation state, as shown in FIG. 5, the winning area "Common 1 coin ALL" or the winning area "Common bell ALL" is won.

In a game in which the winning area "common bell ALL" is won, a winning combination (bell combination) with a payout of 8 coins is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, in a game in which the winning area "Common 1 coin ALL" is won, a winning combination with a payout number of 1 coin is stopped and displayed on the active line. Each of the above-mentioned winning combinations is stopped and displayed on the active line in the bonus operation state, regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation position.

In this embodiment, in the non-internal state, the RBB combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning area "RBB" is won (when the RBB combination is won alone). Moreover, once the RBB combination is missed, another winning combination will definitely be won in the subsequent internal state, so the symbol combination of the RBB combination cannot be stopped and displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the game is basically executed in the internal medium state. However, only in a game in which the winning area "lose" is determined with a probability of 4/65536 in the internal medium state, the symbol combination of the RBB combination can be stopped and displayed.

FIG. 7 is a conceptual diagram of the symbol combination table. The symbol combination table defines combinations of symbols that are permitted to stop on the active line in a game in which each winning combination is won. For example, in a game in which the winning combination "RBB combination" is won, the symbol combination "Blank 1-Blank 1-Blank 2" is allowed to stop on the active line. For example, in a game where the winning combination "Seven Replay" was won, "Seven-Seven-Seven", "Seven-BAR1-Seven", "Seven-Replay-Seven", "Watermelon-Seven-Seven", "Watermelon-BAR1- The symbol combinations “Seven” and “Watermelon Replay Seven” can now be stopped on the active line.

As shown in FIG. 7, the symbol combination table includes the permitted bit number of each symbol combination and the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination related to each winning combination stops on the active line. FIG. 7 shows the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combinations associated with each winning combination stop on the active line. For example, when the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" of the winning combination "Middle Bell" is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of coins to be paid out is "8". Further, when the symbol combination of the RBB combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of coins to be paid out is "0".

As shown in Figure 7, the winning roles are: Chance roles 1 to 9, Cherry roles 1 and 2, Watermelon roles 1 and 2, and Bell roles (middle bell, upper right bell, lower bell, lower right bell, upper bell). ”, “Left failure role (1 to 3)”, “Medium failure role (1, 2)”, and “Right failure role”, each winning combination is displayed on the active line. A number of medals are given to the player according to the number of medals to be paid out. In this embodiment, a winning combination for which medals are paid out when displayed on the active line is referred to as a "winning winning combination". In addition, the fact that the symbol combination of the winning winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line may simply be referred to as "winning."

When any of the winning combinations ``Middle Replay,'' ``Lower Right Replay,'' ``Seven Replay,'' and ``BAR Replay (1 to 4)'' is displayed on the active line, the next game is set as a replay. In the present embodiment, winning combinations whose next game is a replay when displayed on the active line may be collectively referred to as a "replay." If a plurality of winning combinations are won at the same time, the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line with priority over other winning combinations, and the RBB combination has a lower priority than the other winning combinations. However, the bonus winning combination may have a higher priority than the winning winning combination.

Each permission bit number in the symbol combination table specifies each display permission bit in the display permission bit storage area of the main RAM 303. The display permission bit storage area is configured to include a plurality of display permission bits, and each display permission bit corresponds to each winning combination. For example, if "Replay 1" with winning area number "01" is won, the winning combinations "Middle Replay", "Lower Right Replay", "Seven Replay", and "BAR Replay 2-4" are allowed to stop on the active line. Assume that In the above case, the display permission bits specified by the permission bit numbers "01" to "03" and "05" to "07" in the display permission bit storage area are set to "1", and the others are set to "0". Set.

The main RAM 303 stores a display combination storage area that will be compared with a display permission bit storage area in a display determination process to be described later. The display combination storage area is configured to include a plurality of displayable bits, and each displayable bit corresponds to each winning combination (same as the display permission bit storage area). In addition, each displayable bit is set to "1" when there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit stops on the active line, and the symbol combination related to the corresponding winning combination is valid. Set to ``0'' if there is no possibility of stopping on the line. For example, at the time when each reel 12 starts rotating, all the symbol combinations related to winning combinations may stop on the active line, so all displayable bits are set to "1". In addition, each displayable bit in the display combination storage area is updated every time each reel 12 stops, and corresponds to the symbol combination related to the winning combination that actually stopped on the active line when all the reels 12 stopped. Only the displayable bit becomes "1".

The winning combination won in the internal lottery process is stopped on the active line according to the operation mode of each stop button 25 by the player. Specifically, each winning combination is stopped on the active line according to the combination of the stop operation position and stop operation order of each stop button 25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "stop operation mode"). For example, symbols located within a range of 4 frames (5 frames including the stop operation position) from the stop operation position (hereinafter referred to as the "pull-in range") can be stopped on the active line, and symbols located outside the pull-in range can be stopped. , even if the symbol constitutes a winning combination, it is not stopped on the active line (so-called "missing" occurs). However, if a symbol of a winning combination that can win a prize is located in the pull-in range, the symbol must be stopped on the active line (if multiple such symbols are located in the pull-in range, one of them must be stopped on the active line) .

Furthermore, as described above, multiple types of winning combinations may be won over and over again in one game. In a game where a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, the symbol combinations related to the winning combinations according to the order of stop operations and the position of the stop operation, for example, are stopped on the active line. In this embodiment, the combinations of the type of winning combination, stop operation order, and stop operation position that have been won in the current game, and the symbol combinations to be stopped and displayed are associated one-to-one for each winning area.

As mentioned above, the types of winning combinations to be won vary depending on the order of the stop operations. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, it is possible to shift to a gaming state (non-internal state, internal state) in which a stop operation order is provided in which the number of medals to be paid out is unilaterally advantageous. Hereinafter, a stop operation order in which the number of medals to be paid out is unilaterally advantageous may be referred to as an "advantageous press order," and a stop operation order other than the advantageous press order may be referred to as an "unfavorable press order." Further, when the stop operation position is random, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out when playing a game with a specific stop operation order may be written as "expected acquisition value A" for the stop operation order. The above expected acquisition value A is greater when the game is played in an advantageous order than when the game is played in an unfavorable order. However, as will be described in detail later, depending on the state of the balls being put out, if the game is played in an advantageous push order, penalty control is executed in which the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 described above is reduced.

FIGS. 8A and 8B are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the expected acquisition value A. FIG. 8(a) shows a specific example of the expected acquisition value A in the internal medium state among each gaming state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, and bonus operation state). FIG. 8(b) shows a specific example of the expected acquisition value A in the non-internal medium state among each gaming state.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) show the payout number of winning combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line (subject to pull-in) in games in which each winning area is won, for each stop operation order. It will be done. Note that when the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, no medals are paid out, and the right to replay is granted (three medals are automatically inserted). However, the expected acquisition value A in this embodiment is calculated on the assumption that three medals are paid out when the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected acquisition value A may differ between each stop operation order. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the stop operation order of "left first stop, middle second stop, right third stop" may be simply referred to as "left middle right." The same applies to other stopping operation orders. In addition, in this embodiment, each of the six types of stop operation orders, ``left center right'', ``left right center'', ``center left right'', ``center right left'', ``right left middle'', and ``right center left'', is set to ``order 1'' and ``order 2''. ”, “Order 3”, “Order 4”, “Order 5”, and “Order 6”. Further, any one of the above stop operation orders may be simply referred to as "order m." "m" is an integer from number "1" to number "6". Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the expected acquisition value A of "left middle right" (order 1) may be written as "expected acquisition value A1." Similarly, each expected acquisition value A for each stop operation order from "left and right middle" (order 2) to "right middle left" (order 6) is written as "expected acquisition value A2" to "expected acquisition value A6". There are cases.

Below, the method for calculating the expected acquisition value A will be explained in detail. The expected acquisition value Am of the stop operation order m (m=1, 2, 3, . . . 6) is determined by the following formula. In addition, in this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a group number n (n=1, 2, 3...14) is assigned to each group in each winning area. For example, a winning area group including Replay 1, Replay 2, and Replay 3 is given a group number 1 (n=1). In Equation 1, "n" means a group number.

"Hnm" in Equation 1 means the number of payout coins that can be awarded when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins. That is, the payout number Hnm means the payout number of winning combinations that can be won (targeted for attraction) when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins. As described above, even in games where a common winning area is won, the winning combinations that can be won vary depending on the order of stop operations. Therefore, the payout number Hnm changes depending on the order m even if the winning areas are common (even if n is common).

"Pan" in Equation 1 means the probability that any one of the winning areas of group number n will win. "Pbnm" in Equation 1 means the probability of attracting a winning combination when the winning area of group number n is won and the stop operation is performed in order m. The above attraction probability Pb is the probability that the winning combination will win if the stopping operation is performed in the order in which the winning combination is stopped and displayed (the order in which the winning combination is subject to attraction) and the stop operation position is random. . As described above, even if a common winning area is won, the winning combination to be drawn will change depending on the order of stop operations. Therefore, even if the game has a common winning area, the attraction probability Pbnm changes depending on the order of stop operations. Note that in each winning area where the group number n is common, if the order m is common, the combination of the payout number Hnm and the draw-in probability Pbnm is common.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), in a game in which winning areas other than batting order bells 01 to 04 are won in the internal medium state, the payout number Hnm does not change regardless of the stop operation order m. Furthermore, in games in which winning areas other than batting order bells 01 to 04 are won, the pull-in probability Pbnm is the same regardless of the stop operation order m. On the other hand, in a game in which batting order bells 01 to 04 are won, the payout number Hnm changes depending on the stop operation order m. For example, in a game in which batting order bell 01 is won, if the stop operation is performed in "middle left or right", 8 bells will be won, but if the stop operation is performed in any other order, a 1-card winning combination will be drawn. In addition, in a game in which batting order bell 02 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "middle right/left" position, an 8-piece bell will be won, but if the stop operation is performed in any other order, the 1-piece winning combination will be drawn.

Similarly, in a game where batting order bell 03 was won, if you stop with "right, left, middle", you will win 8 bells, but if you stop in any other order, the 1-card winning combination will be subject to draw, and batting order bell 04 will be won. In the game, if you stop in the "right middle left" position, you will win 8 bells, but if you stop in any other order, you will receive a 1-card winning combination. As shown in FIG. 8(a), no matter which batting order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed on the left 1st, the 8-card bell will not be won and the 1-card winning combination will be subject to draw.

In this embodiment, the winning probability Pan for each batting order bell is the same (see FIG. 5 above). In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. The expected value A6 obtained in "Left" is the same in the internal medium state (A3-6=AH). Furthermore, the expected acquisition value A1 for "left middle right" and the expected acquisition value A2 for "left right middle" are common in the internal middle state (A1, 2=AJ). Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the difference between the expected acquisition value A1 and the expected acquisition value A2 is greater than "0" and less than or equal to "0.01". Similarly, a configuration may be adopted in which the difference between the expected acquisition values A3 to A6 is greater than "0" and less than "0.01".

In this embodiment, in the internal medium state, the left 1st is the unfavorable pressing order, and the middle 1st and the right 1st (irregular pressing order) are the advantageous pressing order. Specifically, the expected acquisition value AH for the middle 1st or right 1st (irregular pressing order) is larger than the numerical value "0.1" compared to the expected acquisition value AJ for the left 1st (AH-AJ>0. 1).

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, in a game in which a specific winning area is won, the winning winning combination and the stopping operation mode (order, position) for winning the winning combination are common to each game. "Stop control is common" may be written. As long as the winning area is common, the stop control in each game is basically the same in the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. However, in games where batting order bells 01 to 04 are won, the stop control is exceptionally different between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8(b), in the non-internal medium state, in a game in which batting order bells 01 to 04 are won, the one-card winning combination is subject to draw regardless of the order of stop operations. For example, as described above, in a game where the batting order bell 01 is won in the internal medium state, if the stop operation is performed with "center left/right", 8 bells will be won. On the other hand, in a game in which the batting order bell 01 is won when it is in a non-internal medium state, even if the stop operation is performed in the "center left/right" position, the one-card winning combination is subject to draw.

In the present embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 8(b), in the non-internal state, the expected acquisition values A (1 to 6) for each stop operation order are all common. Specifically, each expected acquisition value A in the non-internal medium state is the same as the expected acquisition value AJ in the left 1st position in the internal medium state. That is, in the non-internal state, there is no advantageous pressing order or unfavorable pressing order. Note that in the non-internal medium state, the difference between the expected acquisition values A1 to A6 may be greater than "0" and less than or equal to "0.01". Also, in the non-internal state, as in the internal state, the left 1st may be the unfavorable press order, and the irregular press order may be the advantageous press order.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game in which the duplicate winning combination 1 is won in the non-internal medium state has the same stop control as the game in which the common one-card winning combination 1 is won in the internal medium state. Similarly, the game in which the duplicate winning combination 2 is won has the same stop control as the game in which the common one-card winning combination 2 is won. Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, penalty control is executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the ball output state of the main CPU 301. The main CPU 301 controls the game in either the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section. In addition, when the ball output state changes, the gaming state is basically maintained. In addition, when the gaming state changes, the ball output state is basically maintained.

Non-advantageous sections include processing related to instruction functions (processing related to transition of ball output status (update processing, lottery processing), processing for executing instructions on the instruction display 16, etc.), excluding processing for transitioning to advantageous sections described below. ) is not executed at all. That is, the non-advantageous section is a section in which instructions on the instruction display 16 are not executed. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function is executed. That is, the advantageous section is a section in which the instruction on the instruction display 16 can be executed.

In this embodiment, a ball output status flag indicating the current ball output status and a gaming status flag indicating the current gaming status are stored in the main RAM 303. In each game, the main CPU 301 transmits a ball release state command indicating a ball release state flag to the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 determines the performance according to the ball release state indicated by the ball release state command. The gaming state flag is referenced when determining the current gaming state.

In principle, the advantageous section ends when a transition to the non-advantageous section is determined in various lottery processes (battle victory determination process, etc.) to be described later. However, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated due to reasons other than this trigger. Specifically, the advantageous section ends when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 3000 times. In addition, when the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as the "difference number"), which is obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used in each game (hereinafter referred to as the "number of inserted medals") from the total value of the number of paid out medals (hereinafter referred to as the "number of difference medals"), reaches 2400, the advantageous section will be activated. finish. If any of the above-mentioned triggers is established, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of the current ball payout state and gaming state.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned difference number of sheets is counted by a difference number counter. The difference number counter described above is smaller than the numerical value "0" when the total value of the number of coins put out is smaller than the total value of the number of input coins. For example, if the total number of coins to be paid out is 2,000 and the total number of coins to be inserted is 3,000, the difference number counter will be a value "-1000". Further, the number of games played in an advantageous section is counted by an advantageous section counter. Each of the above counters is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. Note that, as the trigger for forcibly ending the advantageous section, only the trigger when the difference number counter reaches 2400 sheets may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, on the condition that it is an advantageous section, control is performed to the in-cycle state, battle state, CZ preparation state, CZ state, special CZ state, high point certainty state, AT state, and ending state. It becomes possible. In this embodiment, among the respective ball dispensing states, the ball dispensing states in which instructions on the instruction display 16 are executed may be collectively referred to as an "instruction period." Further, a ball dispensing state in which an instruction on the instruction display 16 is not executed may be collectively referred to as a "non-instruction period." In this embodiment, the AT state and the ending state are instruction periods, and the other ball release states are non-instruction periods.

When a predetermined winning area is won in the non-advantageous section, a transition is made to a specific ball dispensing state (CZ preparation state, in-cycle state) among the respective ball dispensing states in the advantageous section. In this embodiment, when a winning area other than "Replay 1" and "RBB" (see FIG. 5 above) is won, the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section. In a game that moves from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, an advantageous section transition process (process 0 in FIG. 9) is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which an advantageous section is always started in a game in which the above-mentioned winning area is won. However, a predetermined lottery may be executed when the winning area is won, and if the winning area is won, the advantageous section is started, and if the lottery is a loss, the non-advantageous section is maintained.

The contents of the advantageous section transition process change depending on the gaming state (non-internal state, internal state). In the advantageous section transition process of this embodiment, the initial ball release state in the advantageous section changes depending on whether the game state at the start of the game is an internal medium state or a non-internal medium state. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process of the non-internal medium state, transition to the periodic state among each ball release state may be determined (arrow (a) in FIG. 9). As described above, in this embodiment, the non-internal state occurs immediately after the setting value is changed (immediately after the gaming hall opens). In the above configuration, in the advantageous section transition process immediately after changing the set value, transition to the in-cycle state can be determined.

Note that, similarly to the case where the set value is changed, when the above-mentioned clear operation is executed, the ball output state becomes a non-advantageous section and the gaming state becomes a non-internal medium state. Therefore, in the advantageous section transition process immediately after the clear operation is executed, the transition to the in-cycle state can be determined in the same way as the advantageous zone transition process immediately after the set value is changed. On the other hand, in the advantageous section transition process for the internal medium state, transition to the CZ preparation state from each ball release state is determined (arrow (b) in FIG. 9). Furthermore, once the gaming state shifts from the non-internal state to the internal state, the gaming state is basically maintained in the internal state. In the above configuration, in principle, the transition to the CZ preparation state is determined except for the first advantageous section transition process.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, in order to transition to the AT state, the player first aims to transition to the CZ state. Further, the CZ state is entered from the CZ preparation state, and as described above, the CZ preparation state is entered from the non-advantageous section (transition occurs in the order of non-advantageous section -> CZ preparation state -> CZ state). In the present embodiment described above, the gameplay is achieved in which the player aims to shift to a non-advantageous section (end the current advantageous section) in order to shift to the AT state. However, when transitioning to the special CZ state, the transition may occur to the AT state without passing through the non-advantageous section. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the state is directly transferred from the non-advantageous section to the CZ state without going through the CZ preparation state.

A table for explaining specific examples of each process included in each process (0 to 4) described in the transition diagram is shown below the transition diagram in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, the advantageous section transition process includes an advantageous section setting value determination process. In the advantageous section setting value determination process, the advantageous section setting value is determined by lottery. Like the setting values, the advantageous section setting value is determined from six types from numerical value "1" to numerical value "6", and is referred to in various processes (point high probability transfer determination process, battle victory determination process B). Further, the advantageous section setting value determined at the start of the advantageous section is maintained throughout the advantageous section, and the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the more advantageous the advantageous section becomes. Specifically, the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the smaller the average value of the number of games played until the advantageous section ends. In other words, the above configuration can be said to be such that the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the shorter the average number of games played until transition to the CZ state is.

By the way, as mentioned above, the larger the set value, the higher the ball payout rate. Furthermore, the set value once determined does not change until the administrator of the gaming machine performs an operation to change the set value (does not change throughout the day). Therefore, some players may stop playing if they determine that the set value is small (for example, the set value is "2").

Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, the advantageous section setting value determined for the current advantageous section is maintained until the end of the advantageous section, and a new advantageous section setting value is determined for the next advantageous section. A configuration was adopted. According to the present embodiment described above, there is an advantage that even if the set value is small, if a relatively advantageous advantageous section set value is determined, it becomes easier to continue playing the game.

Among the ball issuing states, the in-cycle state is a relatively unfavorable ball issuing state, and is a non-instruction period in which an advantageous stop operation order is not instructed to the player. As shown in FIG. 9, when the in-cycle state starts, the cycle start process (process 1 in FIG. 9) is executed. The cycle start process includes a special CZ determination process, a battle victory determination process B, a cycle ceiling determination process, and a ceiling point determination process. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. In addition, in FIG. 9, the process at the start of a cycle is shown as the process in the in-cycle state. However, in reality, the process at the start of the cycle is executed in the last game in the ball-out state (non-advantageous section, battle state, CZ state, AT state) immediately before the start of the cycle state.

The in-cycle state ends after 76 games, and when the in-cycle state ends, the game shifts to a battle state (arrow (c) in FIG. 9). As will be described in detail later, once the battle state is entered, the state may or may not shift to a non-advantageous section. As described above, upon transition to the non-advantageous section, the vehicle transitions to the CZ state via the CZ preparation state. On the other hand, if the battle state does not transition to the non-advantageous section, then the battle state transitions again to the in-cycle state (arrow (d) in FIG. 9). In the above configuration, the cycle state and battle state are repeated until the transition to the non-advantageous zone (CZ state) (arrow (c) → arrow (d)...arrow (c) → arrow (d)) (repeat transition).

In each game in the in-cycle state, in-cycle point determination processing is executed. In the periodic point determination process, the periodic points are determined with a probability according to the winning area. When the in-cycle point is determined, the in-cycle point is added to the in-cycle point counter. The in-cycle point counter indicates the total of in-cycle points that have been awarded since the current in-cycle state started, and is referenced when transitioning to the battle state. The larger the value of the point counter during the period, the more likely it is to decide to shift to a non-advantageous zone (CZ state) in the battle state.

However, if the total value of points earned during one cycle reaches a predetermined threshold (10,000), the battle will be confirmed even during the middle of the cycle (before transitioning to the battle state). state (arrow (e) in FIG. 9). The confirmed battle state ends after, for example, four games. When the confirmed battle state ends, you will move to a non-advantageous section. In this embodiment, the in-cycle point determined in the in-cycle point determination process is notified on the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like. Further, the current value of the point counter during the period is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Note that the current value of the periodic point counter and the given periodic points may be kept secret.

In each game in the in-cycle state, a point high certainty transfer determination process is executed. In the point high certainty transition determination process, it is determined whether to transition to a high point certainty state with a probability according to the winning area and advantageous section setting values (see FIG. 15(c) described later). Specifically, the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the easier it becomes to shift to the high point certainty state. When the transition to the point high certainty state is determined, the transition to the point high certainty state occurs even in the middle of the in-cycle state (arrow (f) in FIG. 9).

The high point certainty state is a non-instruction period, and the expected value of points during the cycle determined in one game is larger than the during cycle state. The high point certainty state ends, for example, after 10 games, and when the point high certainty state ends, the state returns to the in-cycle state (arrow (g) in FIG. 9). Specifically, in the high point certainty state, the remaining number of games in the in-cycle state is not subtracted. Therefore, for example, if the state shifts to the high point certainty state when the remaining number of games in the periodic state is 10, after the point high certainty state ends, the periodic state is restarted with the remaining number of games remaining 10 times. In the above configuration, when transitioning to a high point certainty state, the period from the start of the periodic state to the transition to the battle state (when the periodic points are (addable period) will be substantially extended. In the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which the remaining number of games in the in-cycle state is subtracted even in the point-high-accuracy state, when transitioning to the point-high-accuracy state, many in-cycle points are required before transitioning to the battle state. becomes easier to obtain.

As described above, the more points a player obtains during a cycle, the more likely it is to decide to move to a non-advantageous section in a battle state. Further, the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the easier it is to shift to the high point certainty state. The above configuration can also be expressed in other words that the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the shorter the number of games until the transition to the non-advantageous section is. Note that even in the high point certainty state, the remaining number of games in the in-cycle state may be subtracted. Furthermore, if the point counter during the period reaches the threshold value "10000" in the high point certainty state, it may be configured to shift to the definite battle state even in the middle of the high point certainty state (same as the during period state).

The battle state is a non-instruction period, and it is reported whether or not to move to a non-advantageous section. Specifically, the battle state continues for five games, and a moving image of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Further, when a battle state is started, a battle victory determination process A is executed. In the battle victory determination process A, it is determined whether or not to move to a non-advantageous section with a probability according to the total value of points during the period acquired in the period state (which may include a high point certainty state). When it is determined to move to a non-advantageous section, a moving image of an ally character winning against an enemy character in a battle state is displayed. On the other hand, if a transition to a non-advantageous section has not been determined, a moving image of an enemy character running away in a battle state is displayed.

In this embodiment, in addition to the above-described battle victory determination process A that is executed when transitioning to a battle state, transition to a non-advantageous section may also be determined in battle victory determination process B. Specifically, the battle victory determination process B is executed at the start of the in-cycle state (in the process at the start of the cycle). If a transition to a non-advantageous section is determined in battle victory determination process B, the transition to a non-advantageous zone is performed after the battle state ends, in the same way as when a transition to a non-advantageous zone is determined in battle victory determination process A. do. Further, in the battle victory determination process B, the advantageous section setting value is referred to. Specifically, the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the easier it is to win the non-advantageous section in the battle victory determination process B. In the above configuration, the larger the advantageous section setting value is, the more remarkable the effect is that the number of games played until shifting to the non-advantageous section (CZ state) is shortened.

If the transition to the non-advantageous section is not determined at the end of the battle state (if the battle is unsuccessful in both battle victory determination processing A and battle victory determination processing B), the transition to the in-cycle state occurs after the battle state ends (Fig. 9 arrow (d)). Specifically, when the battle state ends, the periodic point counter is initialized to a numerical value of "0". Therefore, when a new in-cycle state is started, the in-cycle point counter becomes a value "0".

However, in this embodiment, a ceiling point counter is provided, and before the periodic point counter is initialized, the value of the periodic point counter is added to the ceiling point counter. The above ceiling point counters are not initialized until the transition to the non-advantageous section or the AT state. That is, the ceiling point counter is not initialized during the period of repeated transition to the in-cycle state and the battle state. In addition, ceiling point determination processing is executed in each game in the in-cycle state. In the ceiling point determination process described above, ceiling points are determined by lottery, and the determined ceiling points are added to the ceiling point counter.

In this embodiment, the ceiling point determination process is executed at the start of the in-cycle state (immediately after the battle state ends). In the above ceiling point determination process, it is determined whether the ceiling point counter has reached a predetermined threshold (30000). Further, the ceiling point determination process is also executed in each game in the in-cycle state. When it is determined that the ceiling point counter has reached the threshold value, the state shifts to the above-described determined battle state even in the middle of the period state (arrow (h) in FIG. 9). When the confirmed battle state ends, you will move to a non-advantageous section. In this embodiment, the ceiling point determined in the ceiling point determination process is notified on the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like. Further, the current value of the ceiling point counter is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Note that the current value of the ceiling point counter and the given ceiling points may be kept secret.

In the present embodiment, mid-way victory determination processing is executed in each game in the in-cycle state. In the intermediate victory determination process, it is determined whether or not to move to a non-advantageous section with a probability depending on the winning area. When a shift to the non-advantageous section is determined in the intermediate victory determination process, the shift to the non-advantageous section is made even in the middle of the in-cycle state (arrow (i) in FIG. 9). Specifically, when a transition to a non-advantageous section is determined in the intermediate victory determination process, the transition to the non-advantageous section is performed through a predetermined number of portent games. The number of the above portent games is determined by lottery. In addition, in the above-mentioned portent game, the possibility of winning is suggested in the midway victory determination process.

Further, in this embodiment, a periodic ceiling counter is provided, and a value "1" is added to the periodic ceiling counter when transitioning from the battle state to the periodic state. The above periodic ceiling counters are not initialized until transition to the non-advantageous interval or the AT state. That is, like the ceiling point counter described above, the periodic ceiling counter is not initialized during the period of repeated transition to the in-period state and the battle state. At the start of the periodic state (immediately after the battle state ends), a periodic ceiling determination process is executed, and it is determined whether the periodic ceiling counter has reached a predetermined threshold (9). When the periodic ceiling counter reaches the threshold value, the battle immediately shifts to a confirmed battle state (arrow (j) in FIG. 9) and shifts to a non-advantageous section.

If the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined by the end of the battle state, the transition to the non-advantageous section is made after the battle state ends (arrow (k) in FIG. 9). In this embodiment, in the non-internal medium state, the RBB combination (either RBB, duplicate combination 1, or duplicate combination 2) is won with a probability of about 1/7.5. Therefore, even if the periodic state is started in the non-internal medium state, the period will normally transition to the internal medium state before transitioning to the battle state. That is, the non-advantageous section transitioned from the battle state is in the internal medium state. Further, when an advantageous section is started in a non-advantageous section of the internal medium state, the first ball release state of the advantageous section is the CZ preparation state. In the above configuration, when transitioning from a battle state to a non-advantageous section, the new advantageous section usually starts from the CZ preparation state.

The CZ preparation state is a non-instruction period and ends after 15 games. Furthermore, in the CZ preparation state, CZ level promotion processing is executed. In the CZ level promotion process, the CZ level is promoted with a probability depending on the winning area. Specifically, immediately after the CZ state is started, the CZ level is set to "1". If you win in the CZ level promotion process, the numerical value "1" is added to your CZ level. The maximum value of the CZ level is the numerical value "3". When the CZ preparation state ends, the state shifts to the CZ state (arrow (l) in FIG. 9).

The CZ state is a non-instruction period and ends after 12 games. In the CZ state, AT transition determination processing is executed in each game. In the AT transition determination process, transition to the AT state is determined with probability according to the winning area and CZ level. Specifically, the higher the CZ level is, the easier it is to determine transition to the AT state in the AT transition determination process. When the transition to the AT state is determined, the AT winning flag is changed to the ON state. The CZ state described above can be said to be a ball release state that is more advantageous than the battle state.

The CZ state of this embodiment continues until a total of 12 games are played even if the AT winning flag is changed to the ON state. Further, in the CZ state after the AT winning flag is changed to the ON state, a benefit granting process is executed in each game. In the benefit granting process, various benefits are granted with a probability depending on the winning area. The above benefits include an additional number of games in the AT state.

When the AT winning flag is changed to the ON state in the CZ state, the state shifts to the AT state after the CZ state ends (arrow (m) in FIG. 9). In this embodiment, even if the AT winning flag is in the OFF state, if the CZ level is a numerical value "3", the state shifts to the AT state after the CZ ends. However, the AT transition determination process is also executed in the CZ state where the CZ level is numerically "3". When the CZ level is numerical value "3", as in the case where the CZ level is numerical value "1" or numerical value "2", the above-mentioned procedure will be applied until the AT transition determination process wins and the AT transition flag is changed to ON state. Benefit grant processing is not executed. In a CZ state ending game where the CZ level is other than the numerical value "3", if the AT winning flag is in the OFF state, the state shifts to the in-cycle state (arrow (n) in FIG. 9).

The AT state is an instruction period, in which a stop operation order (hereinafter referred to as "correct press order") in which 8 bells are won in a game in which the batting order bell is won is instructed. When playing according to the instructions in the AT state, the average value of medals that can be earned in each game is about 2.7. The above AT state is more advantageous than the ball release state (during cycle state, etc.) during the non-instruction period.

In addition, in a game in which Replay (2, 3) is won, the symbol combination of 7 Replay can be stopped and displayed in an irregular pressing order, and the middle Replay is stopped and displayed at the left 1st. Immediately after transitioning to the AT state (so-called AT preparation state), there is a notification effect that instructs the stop operation order (irregular press order) in which the symbol combination of 7 Replay is stopped and displayed in the game where Replay (2, 3) is won. is executed. The remaining number of games in the AT state is not subtracted from the time the game shifts to the AT state until the notification effect is executed. In the AT state after the notification performance is executed, the stopping operation order in which the symbol combination of the middle replay is stopped and displayed in the game in which the replay (2, 3) is won is notified. However, in a game where a replay is won in the AT state, the ball payout rate does not change regardless of the order of stop operations, so even if the above-mentioned notification effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 30, the instruction display 16 does not change the ball payout rate. No order of stop operations is indicated.

In the AT state, a "set" consisting of a predetermined number of games is repeatedly executed. Specifically, one set in the AT state consists of 37 games, and a set continuation determination process is executed in each set. In the set continuation determination process, it is determined by lottery whether the AT state will continue to the next set. When winning in the set continuation determination process, the continuation confirmation flag is changed to ON state. If the continuation confirmation flag is in the ON state in the final game of the current set, the AT state will continue in the next set. Note that an additional lottery may be performed during each set in the AT state, and the number of games played (37 times) for the set may be increased (extended).

When the AT state continues to the next set, the AT continuation process (process 3 in FIG. 9) is executed. As shown in FIG. 9, the AT continuation process includes a non-advantageous section transition determination process and a set number counter addition process. In the set number counter addition process, a numerical value "1" is added to the set number counter. The above set number counter indicates the total number of sets in the AT state. The set number counter is referred to in the non-advantageous section transition determination process and the AT end process (special CZ ultra-high accuracy determination process), which will be described later.

In the non-advantageous section shift determination process in the AT continuation process, after the AT state ends, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the non-advantageous section. When the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined, the non-advantageous section shift flag is changed to the ON state. However, even if the non-advantageous section transition flag is changed to the ON state in the AT state, the transition to the non-advantageous section does not occur immediately, but after the end condition of the AT state is met, the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs.

The non-advantageous section transition determination process is executed every time the set continues. In the above configuration, the longer the set continues in the AT state, the more times the non-advantageous section transition determination process is executed, and the non-advantageous section transition flag is likely to be in the ON state by the end of the AT state. Furthermore, in the non-advantageous section shift determination process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the non-advantageous section with a probability according to the current value of the set number counter. Specifically, in the non-advantageous section transition determination process, the larger the set number counter is, the higher the probability is that the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined. The above configuration can also be said to mean that the longer the AT state lasts (the larger the difference number counter is when the AT state ends), the more likely the difference number counter is to be initialized after the end of the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the AT state ends, the AT end process (process 4 in FIG. 9) is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the continuation confirmation flag is in the OFF state in the final game of the set in the AT state, and when the continuation confirmation flag is in the OFF state, the AT end process is executed. However, the game in which it is determined whether the continuation confirmation flag is in the OFF state is not limited to the above example. For example, in a game several times (for example, three times) before the last game in the AT state, it may be determined whether the continuation confirmation flag is in the OFF state, and the AT end process may be executed.

In the AT termination process, the results of the above-described AT continuation process (such as the non-advantageous section transition determination process) are referred to. Specifically, the AT end process includes a non-advantageous section propriety determination process and a special CZ ultra-high certainty determination process. In the non-advantageous section propriety determination process, it is determined whether the above-mentioned non-advantageous section shift flag is in the ON state. That is, in the non-advantageous section transition determination process during the AT state, it is determined whether or not the transition to the non-advantageous section has been determined. If it is determined that the non-advantageous section shift flag is in the ON state, the AT state is completed and then the vehicle shifts to the non-advantageous section (arrow (o) in FIG. 9).

In the non-advantageous section propriety determination process, if it is determined that the non-advantageous section transition flag is in the OFF state, the special CZ ultra-high certainty determination process is executed, and then the transition is made to the in-cycle state (as indicated by the arrow (p) in FIG. )). In the above case, the AT state transitions to the in-cycle state without passing through the non-advantageous section. The above configuration can also be said to mean that the advantageous section counter and the difference number counter are not initialized before and after the AT state ends. As understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, when the AT state ends in an advantageous section, there are cases in which the advantageous section continues without ending, and cases in which the advantageous section ends.

In the special CZ super high probability determination process, it is determined whether or not to set the special CZ lottery state to a super high probability. As will be described in detail later, in cycle start processing (special CZ determination processing) when the in-cycle state is started, whether or not to transition to the special CZ state is determined by lottery. If the special CZ lottery state is set to a very high probability when the AT state ends, the special CZ lottery state will be won with a very high probability when the in-cycle state starts. If the special CZ state is won, the player then moves to the special CZ state (arrow (q) in FIG. 9). However, the special CZ determination process is not executed when the advantageous section counter is less than or equal to the numerical value "500".

In the special CZ state, similarly to the above-mentioned CZ state, AT transition determination processing is executed in each game. The above-mentioned special CZ state is, in common with the CZ state, a ball release state in which the AT state is more likely to be won than the mid-cycle state, battle state, and high point probability state. However, while the vehicle enters the CZ state via a non-advantageous section, it enters the special CZ state without passing through a non-advantageous section.

The special CZ state ends after 10 games. If transition to the AT state is not determined in the special CZ state, the transition to the in-cycle state occurs after the special CZ state ends (arrow (r) in FIG. 9). Note that in the special CZ state, the remaining number of games in the in-cycle state is not subtracted. In the special CZ state, if a transition to the AT state is determined, the transition to the AT state occurs after the special CZ state ends (arrow (s) in FIG. 9). When transitioning from the special CZ state to the AT state, the advantageous section is maintained. In the above configuration, when transitioning from the in-cycle state to the AT state via the special CZ state, the advantageous section is maintained.

As mentioned above, when transitioning from the CZ state to the AT state, when the AT state ends, depending on the result of the non-advantageous section transition determination process, there are cases in which the state shifts to the non-advantageous section (CZ state) and during the cycle. There are cases where the state changes. That is, when transitioning from the CZ state to the AT state, the advantageous section may or may not be maintained. On the other hand, when transitioning from the special CZ state to the AT state, the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs after the AT state ends, regardless of the result of the non-advantageous section transition determination process (arrow (t) in FIG. 9). Specifically, if the AT state is won in the special CZ state, the non-advantageous section shift flag is changed to the ON state at the time the AT state starts. In the above configuration, when the AT state is won in the special CZ state, the state shifts to the CZ state after the AT state ends.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the ending transition condition is satisfied in the AT state, the transition to the ending state occurs (arrow (u) in FIG. 9). The ending state is a designated period like the AT state. Specifically, an ED advantageous section counter is provided, and the ED advantageous section counter is set to an initial value of "3000" at the start of the advantageous section (same as the advantageous section counter). Like the advantageous section counter, the above advantageous section counter for ED is decremented by 1 in each game in the advantageous section. Therefore, the ED advantageous section counter and the advantageous section counter usually have a common value.

In this embodiment, in the final game in each set in the AT state, it is determined whether or not the ED advantageous section counter has a remaining value of "60" or less. If the ED advantageous section counter has a remaining value of "60" or less, the AT state shifts to the ending state. However, the ED advantageous section counter is exceptionally not decremented in games where the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period. Therefore, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period, the game until the transition to the ending state is substantially extended.

In addition, in the final game of each set in the AT state, the number of remaining games in the AT state is multiplied by the numerical value "3" (a value corresponding to the net increase in number of coins in the AT state "2.7"), and the current value of the difference number counter is It is determined whether the calculation result of adding the values (=difference number of coins counter+remaining number of games x 3) exceeds the numerical value "2200". If the calculation result exceeds the numerical value "2200", the AT state shifts to the ending state.

The ending state ends when the advantageous section counter is decremented to the value "0" or when the difference number counter exceeds the value "2400". That is, the ending state ends when the advantageous section is forcibly ended. As shown in FIG. 9, when the ending state ends, the vehicle always moves to the non-advantageous section (arrow (v) in FIG. 9). The gaming state at the end of the ending state is usually the internal medium state. Therefore, when the ending state ends and the vehicle transitions to the non-advantageous section, the vehicle then transitions to the CZ state. In the above configuration, even if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the vehicle transitions to the CZ state with a high expectation of transitioning to the AT state again. Therefore, there is an advantage that dissatisfaction of the player when the advantageous section is forcibly ended is suppressed.

As described above, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period in the advantageous section, the main penalty control is executed. Specifically, a game progress flag is stored in the main RAM 303. As long as the stop operation is performed on the left 1st during the non-instruction period, the game progress flag does not change from the ON state. On the other hand, in a game where the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period, the main penalty control is executed after the third stop operation. When the main penalty control is executed, the game progress flag becomes OFF. Note that the main penalty control is not executed in non-advantageous sections (including games in which advantageous section transition processing is executed).

In the above configuration, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the current game, the game progress flag will be in the OFF state at the start of the next game. When the game progress flag is in the OFF state at the start of the game, the process related to the instruction function is not executed (however, the advantageous section control process (updating process of the advantageous section counter and the difference number counter), which will be described later, is executed). Specifically, if the game progress flag is in the OFF state at the start of the game, various counters (counter indicating the number of remaining games in the current ball output state, the above-mentioned advantageous section counter for ED, etc.) are not subtracted, and , various drawings (such as point drawings during the cycle) are not executed. That is, during the period in which the game progress flag is in the OFF state, a penalty is given that the game cannot be played. When the stop operation is performed on the left 1st, the game progress flag is changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

10(a), FIG. 10(b-1), and FIG. 10(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of each instruction determination table (A, B). In each game, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using an instruction determination table, and displays instruction information (“01” to “04”) corresponding to the instruction number on the instruction display 16. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits a command (second command described later) indicating the instruction number determined for each game to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412).

Each instruction determination table includes an instruction determination table A (FIG. 10(a)) and an instruction determination table B (FIGS. 10(b-1) and 10(b-2)). The instruction determination table A is used to determine the instruction number for each game during the non-instruction period. Further, the instruction determination table B is used to determine the instruction number of each game in the instruction period. Specifically, the instruction determination table A is used regardless of the gaming state (non-internal medium state, internal medium state, bonus operation state) during the non-instruction period. The instruction determination table B used in the instruction period includes an instruction determination table B1 and an instruction determination table B2. The instruction determination table B1 is used in the internal medium state, and the instruction determination table B2 is used in states other than the internal medium state. As shown in FIG. 10, each instruction determination table is configured to include each instruction number for each winning area.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the instruction number "99" is determined regardless of which winning area wins during the non-instruction period. Specifically, during the non-instruction period, the instruction number "99" is determined regardless of the gaming state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus operation state). When the instruction number "99" is determined, the instruction display 16 does not display instruction information. Specifically, when the instruction number "99" is determined, the instruction display 16 displays the number "0" during the period in which instruction information is displayed. According to the above configuration, the stop operation mode is not instructed by the instruction display 16 during the non-instruction period.

FIG. 10(b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table B1. As shown in FIG. 10(b-1), if batting order bell 01 is won in each game in the internal medium state during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines instruction number "01". When the instruction number "01" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "1" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "1") as instruction information. As described above, when batting order bell 01 is won, the correct pressing order is "middle, left, right." In the above configuration, in a game where instruction information "1" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle left/right", it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "center left/right". In other words, the above configuration can also be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "middle left and right" by displaying the instruction information "1".

In each game in the internal medium state during the instruction period, if batting order bell 02 is won, the main CPU 301 determines instruction number "02". When the instruction number "02" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "2" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "2") as instruction information. As described above, when batting order bell 02 is won, the correct pressing order is "center, right, left." In the above configuration, in a game where instruction information "2" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle right left", it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "2" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "middle right left". In other words, the above configuration can be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "middle right left" by displaying the instruction information "2".

In each game in the internal medium state during the instruction period, if batting order bell 03 is won, the main CPU 301 determines instruction number "03". When the instruction number "03" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "3" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "3") as instruction information. As described above, when the batting order bell 03 is won, the correct pressing order is "right, left, center." In the above configuration, in a game where the instruction information "3" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the order of "right, left, center", it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "3" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "right, left, middle". The above configuration can also be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "right, left, middle" by displaying the instruction information "3".

In each game in the internal medium state during the instruction period, if batting order bell 04 is won, the main CPU 301 determines instruction number "04". When the instruction number "04" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "4" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "4") as instruction information. As described above, when the batting order bell 04 is won, the correct pressing order is "right-center-left." In the above configuration, in a game where instruction information "4" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the "right middle left" order, it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "4" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "right middle left". In other words, the above configuration can be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "right center left" by displaying the instruction information "4".

FIG. 10(b-2) is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table B2. As described above, the instruction determination table B2 is used in the non-internal state and the bonus activation state. In the non-internal medium state, in a game in which batting order bells 01 to 04 are won, only a 1-card combination can be won regardless of the order of stop operations (8-card bells do not win. See FIG. 8(b)). Furthermore, in the bonus operating state, the batting order bell is not won in the first place. Considering the above circumstances, in the non-internal medium state and bonus activation state where the instruction determination table B2 is used, the instruction number "99" is determined regardless of the winning area, as shown in FIG. 10 (b-2). .

FIG. 10(c) is a schematic diagram of the segment display D1. The segment display D1 includes the instruction display 16 described above. The instruction display 16 is a two-digit, seven-segment display. FIG. 10C shows an example of the instruction display 16 that displays instruction information "1". As shown in FIG. 10(c), the segment indicator D1 includes an advantageous section indicator 38. The advantageous section indicator 38 is turned on (lights up) in the advantageous section.

As mentioned above, the instruction period is included in the advantageous section. Therefore, during the instruction period in which instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16, the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up. Specifically, in a non-advantageous period game in which a winning area other than RBB and Replay 1 is won, an advantageous period is started in the process when the game is stopped. The advantageous section indicator 38 lights up at the first game start operation in the advantageous section. In addition, the advantageous section display 38 is turned off in the process when the game is stopped when the advantageous section ends. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the display controlled by the main CPU 301 does not notify that the vehicle is in an advantageous section. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section indicator 38 is omitted.

FIG. 10(d) is a schematic diagram of the segment display D2. The segment display D2 includes the storage number display 17 described above. The storage number display 17 is a two-digit, seven-segment display. FIG. 10(d) shows a specific example where the number of credits is the numerical value "50". As shown in FIG. 10(d), the segment display D2 includes an internal display 39. As shown in FIG. The internal medium indicator 39 is in an ON state (lit) in the internal medium state, and is in an OFF state in other gaming states. Specifically, at the time of the start operation of the game in which the RBB combination is won in the non-internal state, the internal state indicator 39 changes from the OFF state to the ON state.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining each command (first command, second command) sent from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412.

As shown in FIG. 11, the main CPU 301 transmits a first command (such as "A00") to the sub CPU 412 depending on the winning area. For example, if the winning area of the current game is a loss, the main CPU 301 sends a command “A00” to the sub CPU 412. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A01" if Replay 1 is won, a command "A02" if Replay 2 is won, and a command "A03" if Replay 3 is won. .

If Chance 1 is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A04". Furthermore, if Chance 2 is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A05". Similarly, if Chance 3 is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A06". The main CPU 301 transmits a command "A07" when a weak cherry is won, a command "A08" when a strong cherry is won, and a command "A09" when a watermelon is won. Furthermore, if the common 1 ticket 1 is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A10", if the common 1 ticket 2 is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A11", and if the common 1 ticket ALL is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command Send "A12", and if common bell ALL is won, send command "A13", if RBB is won, send command "A14", and if duplicate combination 1 is won, send command "A15". If the duplicate combination 2 is won, the command "A16" is transmitted.

The main CPU 301 of this embodiment determines that the winning area belonging to the specific group has been won if any of the three common cards and batting order bells 01 to 04 of each winning area is won. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the main CPU 301 does not transmit the first command in a game in which a winning area of a specific group is won. Specifically, if a winning area other than a specific group wins, the winning will be awarded regardless of the gaming state (non-internal state, internal state, bonus activation state) and ball payout state (instruction period, non-instruction period). A first command corresponding to the area is transmitted. On the other hand, if the winning area of the specific group is won, the first command is not transmitted regardless of the gaming state and ball dispensing state.

Assume a configuration in which each first command corresponding to each batting order bell is transmitted. With the above configuration, the type of batting order bell can be specified from the first command. That is, the correct pressing order of the batting order bells can be specified from the first command. In the above configuration, there is room for fraudulent activity in which the first command is obtained (eavesdropped) using an unauthorized board and the correct pressing order of the batting order bells is specified during the non-instruction period. According to the configuration of this embodiment, since the first command is not transmitted in a game in which a specific group (including the batting order bell) wins, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are suppressed. Furthermore, the configuration of this embodiment has the advantage that the number of types of first commands is reduced.

When the sub CPU 412 receives the above first command, it determines various effects according to the first command. For example, when the command "A01" in the case where Replay 1 has been won is received, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect to notify that Replay 1 has been won.

In addition to the first command, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command (such as "B01") according to the instruction number (instruction information) of the current game to the sub CPU 412. Specifically, when the instruction number "99" (no instruction) is determined in the current game, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B99" to the sub CPU 412, as shown in FIG. As described above, the instruction number "99" is determined during the non-instruction period regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, during the non-instruction period, the command "B99" is transmitted in every game. In addition, in a game in which a player other than the batting order bell wins, the instruction number "99" is determined regardless of the ball placement state and the game state. Therefore, in a game where a winning number other than the batting order bell is won, the command "B99" is transmitted regardless of the ball placement state and the game state.

As shown in FIG. 11, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B01" when the batting order bell 01 is won in the middle state of the instruction period and the instruction number "01" (center left/right order) is determined. Further, if the batting order bell 02 is won in the internal middle state of the instruction period and the instruction number "02" (center right left order) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B02". Similarly, when the batting order bell 03 is won in the internal state of the instruction period and the instruction number "03" (right, left, middle order) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B03" and In this state, if the batting order bell 04 is won and the instruction number "04" (right middle left order) is determined, the command "B04" is transmitted.

In the present embodiment described above, when the batting order bell is won during the instruction period (AT state, etc.), the second command is transmitted, while the first command is not transmitted. As mentioned above, if the batting order bell is won in a non-internal state, no matter which stop operation order is used, the 8 bells will not be able to win, and the instruction number "99" (no instruction) will be determined. Ru. Considering the above circumstances, the main CPU 301 transmits the second command "B99" even during the instruction period if the batting order bell is won in a non-internal state.

When the above second command is received by the sub CPU 412, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect that instructs the stop operation order of the instruction number specified by the second command. In the instruction performance, for example, the liquid crystal display device 30 instructs the same stop operation order as the stop operation order specified by the instruction information. As described above, the only second command transmitted during the non-instruction period is the command "B99" (no instruction). Therefore, in principle, no instruction performance is performed during the non-instruction period. However, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that instructs a stop operation order that does not affect the ball payout rate (has a small effect) is executed.

The main CPU 301 calculates various types of game information (continuous combination ratio, role object ratio, most recent successive role ratio, most recent role object ratio, instruction-inclusive role object ratio, bonus game ratio) according to the progress of the game, and calculates the game information. Display information corresponding to the main display 40 is displayed. In order to calculate the above game information, the main CPU 301 counts the number of games played during the period from when the power is first turned on to the gaming machine 1 until the number of games reaches 175,000 (hereinafter referred to as the "total game counting period"). do.

FIG. 12(a) is a diagram for explaining each storage area (G1 to G3, g1, g2) of the main RAM 303. Each of the above-mentioned storage areas is provided to store the above-mentioned game information (continuous combination ratio, etc.), and includes storage area G1, storage area G2, storage area G3, storage area G4, storage area g1, and storage area g2. include. For example, each storage area can store one byte of information.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the period in which the so-called "accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special accessory" operates may be simply referred to as "the first award series". Similarly, the period during which the so-called "accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory" operates may be simply referred to as "second-class special accessory". The first winning combination and the second winning combination end with the payout of a predetermined number of medals. In addition, the period during which the so-called "first class special accessory" is activated is simply referred to as "during the first accessory", and the period during which the so-called "second type special accessory" is activated is simply referred to as "during the second accessory". It may be written as During the first accessory, the game ends after eight games, and during the second accessory, the game ends after one game. In addition, the period during which the so-called "ordinary yakubutsu" operates may be described as "during the ordinary yakubutsu." Normally, the game ends in one game.

The bonus operating state of this embodiment is the first combination of winnings, and all games are during the first winnings. In addition, "1st role general middle" may be provided in the 1st role group. In the first winning combination general, it is easier to win the winning combination (RB winning combination) that activates the first type special accessory compared to the gaming states other than the first winning combination general. Furthermore, when a second role group is provided, a "second role group general middle" may be provided in the second role group. In the second winning series general, it is easier to win the winning winning combination (CB winning combination) that activates the second type special accessory compared to the gaming states other than the second winning combination general.

The successive combination ratio is the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as the "total number of medals A") earned from the time the power is first turned on to the present (hereinafter referred to as the "total gaming period"), of the number of medals in the first role (the number of medals in the first role). This is the ratio of the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as "Number of consecutive medals B") obtained in the first prize (including the first prize) (Continuous prize ratio = B/A). The number of consecutive medals B in this embodiment is the number of medals acquired in the bonus activation state (in the first role of the first role). As shown in FIG. 12(a), the consecutive combination ratio is stored in the storage area G1.

The main CPU 301 calculates the consecutive combination ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G1. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as a continuous ratio in the storage area G1.

The accessory ratio is the ratio of the total number of medals obtained in the first accessory, second accessory, and ordinary accessory (hereinafter referred to as "number of accessory medals C") to the total number of medals A. Yes (accessory ratio = C/A). As shown in FIG. 12(a), the accessory ratio is stored in the storage area G2. The number C of accessory medals in this embodiment is the number of medals obtained during the first accessory (bonus operation state) because it is not provided during the second accessory and the normal accessory.

The main CPU 301 calculates the accessory ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G2. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the accessory ratio in the storage area G2. The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is the total number of medals (C+D) that is the sum of the total number of medals obtained in the game whose pressing order is specified by the instruction display 16 (hereinafter referred to as "instruction game medal number D") and the number of accessory medals C. is the proportion of the total number of medals A (ratio of accessories including instructions = (C+D)/A).

The number D of instructed game medals in this embodiment described above can also be referred to as the total number of medals won by the specified group in games during the instructed period. In this embodiment, in a game where the instruction display 16 has instructed the pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed in a position other than the pressing order (if the pressing order is incorrect), the one-card winning combination can be stopped and displayed. In the above case, the numerical value "1" is added to the instructed number D of game medals.

The main CPU 301 calculates the instruction-included accessory ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G3. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part in the storage area G3 as the designated accessory ratio. In addition, in a game in which a specific group wins during a non-instruction period, a first command is sent from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412, which indicates that the irregular pressing order is unilaterally advantageous. However, in the above game, even if medals are awarded, the instructed game medal number D is not added.

The most recent successive combination ratio is the number of medals earned in the most recent 6000 games (hereinafter referred to as the "latest total number of medals a") among the first winning combinations (including the first winning combination of the first winning combination) This is the ratio of the number of medals acquired in (hereinafter referred to as the "number of medals in the most recent consecutive combination b") (the most recent consecutive combination ratio = b/a). The most recent successive combination medal number b in this embodiment is the number of medals acquired in the bonus activation state (in the first role of the first role) in the most recent 6000 games. As shown in FIG. 12(a), the most recent consecutive combination ratio is stored in the storage area g1. Note that if the number of games played in the total gaming period is 6000 or less, the consecutive combination ratio and the most recent consecutive combination ratio match (B/A=b/a).

The main CPU 301 calculates the most recent consecutive combination ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area g1. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the nearest continuous ratio in the storage area g1.

The most recent yakuza ratio is the total number of medals acquired in the first yakuza, second yakuza, and ordinary yakuza (hereinafter referred to as "the number of yakuza medals c") out of the latest total number of medals a. It is a ratio (accessory ratio = c/a). The number c of accessory medals in this embodiment is not set during the second accessory and the normal accessory, so it is the number of medals acquired during the first accessory (bonus activation state) in the most recent 6000 games. Become. As shown in FIG. 12(a), the most recent accessory ratio is stored in the storage area g2. Note that if the number of games in the total gaming period is 6000 or less, the accessory ratio and the most recent accessory ratio match (C/A=c/a).

The main CPU 301 calculates the most recent accessory ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area g2. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the nearest accessory ratio in the storage area g2.

The bonus game ratio is the number of games played by the first winning combination (including during the first winning role), the number of games played by the second winning combination (including during the second winning role), out of the total number of games E during the total gaming period. The number of bonus games F, which is the sum of the number of games in the first role (excluding the first role), the number of games in the second role (excluding the second role), and the number of games in the normal role, is (Bonus game ratio = F/E). The number of bonus games F in this embodiment is the total number of games in the bonus operating state.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the bonus game ratio is stored in the storage area G4. The main CPU 301 calculates the bonus game ratio for each game and stores the calculation result in the storage area G4. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the bonus game ratio in the storage area G4.

The above total number of medals A, number of consecutive medals B, number of accessory medals C, number of instruction game medals D, total number of games E, number of bonus games F, most recent total number of medals a, number of most recent consecutive medals b, and accessory The number of medals c is separately stored in a dedicated counter provided in the main RAM 303, and is added up at each of the above-mentioned triggers. For example, when medals are awarded in each game for which an instruction has been executed, the number D of medals for the instructed game is added. Furthermore, when medals are awarded in the bonus activation state, the number C of accessory medals is added. Furthermore, when game media are awarded in each game, the total number of medals A is added regardless of whether or not there is an instruction for the stop operation order.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the total number of games E reaches 175,000 times, the updating of the consecutive combination ratio, accessory ratio, instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and bonus game ratio is stopped. On the other hand, the most recent consecutive winning combination ratio and the most recent winning combination ratio are also updated in the period after the total number of games E reaches 175,000.

FIG. 12(b-1) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays display information HA. When the display information HA is displayed, the first display section 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "6A" corresponding to the combination ratio, and the second display section 40Y displays the current value of the storage area G1. (size of consecutive combination ratio) is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HA, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "60" or more (G1≧60), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, in the case of displaying the display information HA, when the number of games in the total game period is less than 17,500, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 12(b-2) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays the display information HB. When the display information HB is displayed, the character string "7A" corresponding to the accessory ratio is displayed on the first display section 40X of the main display 40, and the current value of the storage area G2 is displayed on the second display section 40Y. is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HB, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "70" or more (G2≧70), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HB and the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 17,500, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 12(b-3) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays display information HC. When the display information HC is displayed, the character string "7P" corresponding to the instruction-included accessory ratio is displayed on the first display section 40X of the main display 40, and the character string "7P" corresponding to the instruction-included accessory ratio is displayed on the second display section 40Y. The current value is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HC, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "70" or more (G3≧70), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, in the case of displaying the display information HC, when the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 175,000 (E<175,000), the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner. In addition, even if the instruction-included accessory ratio reaches the numerical value "70", if the condition for transitioning to the complete state has not been achieved (Cmy<19000), the game will continue without transitioning to the complete state described below. is possible to continue.

FIG. 12(b-4) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays the display information HD. When the display information HD is displayed, the first display section 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "6Y" corresponding to the most recent combination ratio, and the second display section 40Y displays the current value of the storage area g1. The value is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HD, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "60" or more (g1≧60), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HD, and when the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 6000, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 12(b-5) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays the display information HE. When the display information HE is displayed, the first display section 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "7Y" corresponding to the nearest character ratio, and the second display section 40Y displays the current information in the storage area g2. The value is displayed.

When displaying the display information HE, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "70" or more (g2≧70), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HE, and when the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 6000, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 12(b-6) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays display information HF. When the display information HF is displayed, a character string "5F" corresponding to the bonus game ratio is displayed on the first display section 40X of the main display 40, and the current value of the storage area G4 is displayed on the second display section 40Y. is displayed.

When displaying the display information HF, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "50" or more (G4≧50), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HF and the number of games played in the total gaming period is less than 175,000, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

As described above, the above display information is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (approximately 5 seconds). Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main display 40 displays a test pattern for about 5 seconds. In the above test pattern, all segments of the main display 40 are displayed blinking. Thereafter, the main display 40 displays each display information for about 5 seconds in the order of display information HC, display information HD, display information HE, display information HA, display information HB, and display information HF. Further, after displaying the display information HF, each display information is repeatedly displayed from the beginning (from the display information HC).

In addition to the period immediately after the power is turned on, the main display 40 may also be configured to display the test pattern during other periods. For example, the main display 40 may be configured to display a test pattern during a period in which the set value can be changed. Further, the main display 40 may be configured to display a test pattern during a period in which the set value can be confirmed. Note that the test pattern may be different between a period immediately after the power is turned on and another period.

<Each data used by sub CPU>
Hereinafter, various data stored in the sub ROM 413 will be explained using the drawings. The sub ROM 413 stores various data including a notification effect determination table.

When the sub CPU 412 receives a second command (other than B99 (no instruction)) indicating an instruction number (instruction information), it determines one of the notification effects using the notification effect determination table. When the notification effect is determined, the sub CPU 412 transmits a performance control command indicating the notification effect to the image control board (image control CPU 421) 420.

When the image control CPU 421 receives a performance control command indicating a notification performance, the image control CPU 421 displays each image of the notification performance on the liquid crystal display device 30. In this embodiment, when the sub control board (sub CPU 412) 400 receives a second command that specifies a stop operation order advantageous to the player (when the main CPU 301 transmits the second command), the second command The notification of the stop operation mode (stop operation order) corresponding to the above is always executed by the sub CPU 412.

Note that from the first command, which indicates that the specific group has won, a stop operation order (irregular press order) that is unilaterally advantageous in the current game is specified. However, the first command does not specifically specify the order of stop operations (order of correct presses) that is advantageous to the player. Even if the sub CPU 412 receives the first command in the non-instruction period, it does not notify the stop operation order.

FIG. 13 is a conceptual diagram of the notification effect determination table. When the sub CPU 412 receives any of the commands "B01" to "B04" as the second command, it determines the notification effect based on the notification effect determination table. As described above, the commands "B01" to "B04" are transmitted during the instruction period and are not transmitted during the non-instruction period. That is, the sub CPU 412 determines the notification performance based on the notification performance determination table during the game specified by the main CPU 301.

Specifically, when the second command "B01" is received, the notification effect X1 is determined. In the notification effect X1, the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like notifies the stop operation order of "middle left and right". Furthermore, when the second command "B02" is received, the notification effect X2 is determined, and when the second command "B03" is received, the notification effect X3 is determined and the second command "B04" is received. In this case, notification effect X4 is determined. In the above notification effect X2, the stop order of "center right left" is notified, in the notification effect X3, the stop order of "center right left" is notified, and in the notification effect X4, the stop order of "center right left" is notified. Ru. In each of the above-mentioned notification effects X (1 to 4), the correct pressing order of the batting order bells is notified.

FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b) are diagrams for explaining a specific example in which the ball release state shifts from a non-advantageous section. As described above, the type of ball release state that can be transferred from the non-advantageous section changes depending on whether it is an internal medium state or a non-internal medium state.

FIG. 14(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a case where an advantageous section is started (the ball output state shifts) in a non-advantageous section in a non-internal medium state. In this embodiment, when the set value is changed, the gaming state becomes a non-internal state, and the ball output state becomes a non-advantageous section. In the specific example of FIG. 14(a), it is assumed that after the set value is changed, a transition is made to the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state (Sa0 in FIG. 14(a)). Note that, as described above, even when a clear operation is executed, the transition is made to the non-advantageous section in the non-internal state.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state, the ball output state changes depending on the winning area. For example, in a game in which Replay 1 or RBB (single) is won in a non-advantageous section in a non-internal medium state, a transition to an advantageous section is not determined (Sa11 in FIG. 14(a)). Therefore, the non-advantageous period will continue in the next and subsequent games. Note that the probability that RBB wins and the probability that Replay 1 wins in the non-internal medium state are approximately 1/16384 in common. On the other hand, if a player other than Replay 1 or RBB (single) wins in the non-advantageous section in the non-internal medium state (Sa12 to Sa14, which will be described later), the non-advantageous section ends and shifts to the advantageous section. In the above configuration, in most cases, one game is completed in the non-advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), when the duplicate combination 2 is won in the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state (Sa12 in FIG. 14(a)), the state shifts to the CZ preparation state among the ball states of the advantageous section. . Note that the probability of winning the duplicate combination 2 in the non-internal medium state is approximately 1/40. On the other hand, if the duplicate winning combination 1 is won in the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state (Sa13 in FIG. 14(a)), the game shifts to the in-cycle state among the ball-out states of the advantageous section.

Similarly, if another winning area (Replay 2, etc.) wins in the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state (Sa14 in Fig. 14(a)), the transition to the in-cycle state among the ball-out states of the advantageous section do. That is, when a win other than the duplicate winning combination 2 (winning probability=approximately 1/40) is won among each winning area that starts the advantageous section, the state shifts to the in-cycle state. In the above configuration, when a new advantageous section is started in a non-advantageous section in the non-internal medium state, the transition to the in-cycle state has a probability of approximately 39/40. That is, when a new advantageous section is started in a non-advantageous section in a non-internal medium state, the first ball release state of the advantageous section will be in the period middle state with a high probability.

FIG. 14(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the ball release state transitioning from the non-advantageous section. In the specific example of FIG. 14(a) described above, a non-advantageous section is assumed immediately after the set value is changed or a clear operation is executed, but in the specific example of FIG. 14(b), a transition from an advantageous section is assumed. Assume an unfavorable section. As explained using FIG. 9 above, the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined in the battle state, during cycle state, AT state, and ending state among the ball release states of the advantageous section. Further, after the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined, when an opportunity to end the advantageous section is established (Sb11 and Sb12 in FIG. 14(b)), the vehicle actually shifts to the non-advantageous section.

For example, if you win in the battle victory determination process described above (if it is decided to move to a non-advantageous section), then when the battle state ends (an example of a timing when the advantageous section ends), you will move to the non-advantageous section ( Sb11 in FIG. 14(b)). Furthermore, if it is determined to move to a non-advantageous section in the AT state, then the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs when the AT state ends (an example of a timing when the advantageous section ends) (Sb11 in FIG. 14(b)) . In addition, in the in-cycle state, for example, if the in-cycle point counter reaches the value "10000", the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs when the confirmed battle state ends (an example of the end of the advantageous section) (Fig. 14 (b) Sb11).

However, in the present embodiment, even if an opportunity to end the advantageous section is established in the advantageous section, the transition to the non-advantageous section may be extended. Specifically, when an advantageous section end opportunity is established in a battle state, a periodic state, or an AT state among the ball release states, a process when an end opportunity is established (Sb2 in FIG. 14(b)) is executed. In the above-described processing when the termination opportunity is established, the time to shift to the non-advantageous section may be extended.

FIG. 14(c) is a flowchart of the process when the termination trigger is established. The main CPU 301 executes a process when an end opportunity is established in a start process immediately after the game is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(c), in a game in which an opportunity to end an advantageous section is established in an advantageous section (Sb11), a process when an opportunity for termination is established is executed.

When the end opportunity establishment process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether RBB (single) has been won in the current game (Sb21). The case where "Yes" is determined in step Sb21 above is assumed to be a case where an advantageous section end opportunity is established in a game in which RBB (single) in a non-internal state is won. If it is determined that RBB has been won (Sb21: Yes), the main CPU 301 skips the other steps (including Sb23, which will be described later), and ends the process when the termination opportunity is established. In the above configuration, the advantageous section does not end in a game in which RBB is won. In other words, in a game where there is a possibility of transitioning to a bonus activation state, the transition to a non-advantageous section is not made.

If it is determined that RBB has not been won in the current game (Sb21: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether the gaming state is the internal medium state (Sb22). If it is determined that the main CPU 301 is not in the internal state (Sb22: No), the main CPU 301 skips the other steps (including Sb23) and ends the process when the termination trigger is established. On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal state is in progress (Sb22: Yes), the main CPU 301 changes the advantageous section end flag to the ON state (Sb23), and ends the process when the end opportunity is established.

When the advantageous section end flag is changed to the ON state at the start of the game, all information related to the instruction function is initialized in the stop processing executed after the third stop operation, and the ball output state becomes unfavorable. It will be changed to section. On the other hand, if the successful game that triggered the end of the advantageous section is in a non-internal state, the advantageous section end flag is not changed from the OFF state. In the above case, the advantageous section will be maintained until the game in the internal medium state (including games in which duplicate winning combinations were won, and excluding games in which RBB won alone) is executed after the advantageous period ending opportunity is established, and the advantageous period ends. The process when the trigger is established is executed repeatedly. In other words, the above configuration can also be said to extend the transition to the non-advantageous section until the transition to the internal medium state when the advantageous section end opportunity is established in the non-internal medium state.

As described above, according to the processing when the termination opportunity is established in this embodiment, if the vehicle is not in the internal intermediate state, even if the advantageous interval termination opportunity is established, the transition to the non-advantageous interval does not occur until the transition to the internal intermediate state. Therefore, except for the non-advantageous section immediately after the setting value is changed or the clearing operation is performed, the gaming state of the non-advantageous section is, in principle, the internal medium state. In addition, when the ball output state shifts, if the advantageous section is maintained, the ball output state will shift regardless of the gaming state (even if it is a non-internal medium state). For example, when transitioning from the AT state to the mid-cycle state while maintaining the advantageous section, the ball output state changes regardless of the gaming state.

The explanation returns to FIG. 14(b). As described above, if an opportunity to end an advantageous section is established in a battle state, in a cycle state, or in an AT state, a process when an end opportunity is established is executed, and if it is in an internal state, a transition is made to a non-advantageous section (FIG. 14(b)) Sb3). On the other hand, when the ending state ends, the processing when the end opportunity is established is omitted and the process moves to the non-advantageous section (Sb12 in FIG. 14(b)). As described above, the ending state ends when the advantageous section is forcibly ended (advantageous section counter = 0, difference sheet number counter = 2400). Therefore, when the ending state ends, the game moves to a non-advantageous section regardless of the gaming state. However, in the specific example of FIG. 14(b), it is assumed that the game state when the ending state ends is the internal medium state.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if Replay 1 is won in the non-advantageous section in the internal medium state (Sb41 in FIG. 14(b)), the non-advantageous section continues. Note that even if RBB (single) wins, the non-advantageous section continues, but RBB does not win in the internal medium state. In the non-advantageous section of the internal medium state, if a winning area other than Replay 1 is won (Sb42 in FIG. 14(b)), the system shifts to the CZ preparation state among the ball release states of the advantageous section. As understood from the above explanation, in the advantageous section transferred from the non-advantageous section of the internal medium state, the initial ball release state becomes the CZ preparation state. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the non-advantageous section of the internal medium state can transition to the periodic state with a lower probability than the probability of transitioning from the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state to the periodic state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the advantageous section transition process in the non-advantageous section is more advantageous in the subsequent internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state immediately after the set value is changed or the clear operation is executed. . Specifically, in the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state, the probability is about 1/40 to transition to the CZ preparation state, while in the non-advantageous section started in the internal medium state, the transition to the CZ preparation state is guaranteed. Let us assume a comparative example in which, if the game moves to the non-advantageous section, it can always move to the CZ preparation state regardless of the gaming state. In the above comparison example, the situation immediately after the opening of the game hall becomes excessively advantageous, and the problem that the gambling nature of the players is excessively stimulated tends to occur. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the opportunity for ending the advantageous section is established, if the gaming state is in the non-internal medium state, the shift to the non-advantageous section is extended until the gaming state shifts to the internal medium state. Let us assume a comparative example in which even if the gaming state is in the non-internal medium state in the advantageous section, it shifts to the non-advantageous section. In the above comparison example, the gaming state may become a non-internal medium state even though it is a non-advantageous section that has transitioned from an advantageous section (it is not a non-advantageous section immediately after the setting value is changed). Therefore, there may be an inconvenience that the CZ preparation state is not entered except in the non-advantageous section immediately after the set value is changed or the clear operation is executed. According to this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

As described above, this embodiment has a configuration in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the differential sheet number counter reaches 2400 sheets. According to the above configuration, the inconvenience that the total number of medals awarded at one time becomes excessive is suppressed. However, with only the above configuration, there is a problem that the inconvenience that the total number of medals awarded during business hours of the game hall (in one day) becomes excessive cannot be sufficiently suppressed. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment includes a configuration that sufficiently suppresses the inconvenience that the total number of medals awarded in one day becomes excessive. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 15A is a diagram for explaining an additional configuration for suppressing the inconvenience that the total number of medals awarded at one time is excessive. This embodiment has a configuration that stops the game (so-called "stopping") when the total number of medals awarded in one day reaches 19,000.

Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with a MY counter Cmy. The MY counter Cmy has a size of, for example, 2 bytes, and is updated according to the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for each game. For example, in a game where the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 8, the value "5" is added to the MY counter Cmy. On the other hand, in a game where the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the value "3" is subtracted from the MY counter Cmy. Furthermore, when the MY counter Cmy is decremented below the numerical value "0", it is returned to the numerical value "0". The above MY counter Cmy can also be said to indicate the total value of the net increase in the number of medals (number of medals paid out - number of inserted medals) from the time when the increase in medals started (hereinafter referred to as "increase start time"). When the above-mentioned MY counter Cmy reaches a predetermined threshold value "19000", the game shifts to a game stop state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game. That is, when the net increase in the number of coins from the start of the increase reaches 19,000 coins, the game shifts to a stopped state.

FIG. 15(a) shows a specific example until the MY counter Cmy reaches the above-mentioned threshold value. FIG. 15(a) shows the numerical value of the MY counter Cmy at each time point. In the specific example of FIG. 15(a), it is assumed that the power is turned on at time t0. Immediately after the power is turned on, the MY counter Cmy is initialized to the numerical value "0". Note that details of the trigger for initializing the MY counter Cmy will be described later (see FIG. 21).

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 15A, it is assumed that there is a non-instruction period from time t0 to time t1. In the non-instruction period, the expected value of the net increase in the number of medals in each game is less than the numerical value "0" (ball output rate < 100%). Furthermore, when the MY counter Cmy is subtracted to a negative number, it is returned to the numerical value "0". Therefore, during the period from time t0 to time t1, MY counter Cmy is normally maintained at a value of "0". In the specific example of FIG. 15A, it is assumed that the time t1 is the time when the increase starts, and the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" at the subsequent time t2.

In the specific example of FIG. 15(a) above, the game can be progressed during the period from time t0 when the power is turned on to time t2 when MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" (medal insertion operation, game It is in a state where it is possible to sequentially accept start operations and pattern stop operations. On the other hand, the period after the time t2 when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" is a complete state in which the game cannot proceed. Note that even if the MY counter Cmy increases after entering the instruction period, if the instruction period ends and the MY counter Cmy continues to decrease before moving to the complete state, the MY counter Cmy will eventually The value becomes "0". After that, the MY counter Cmy is basically maintained at the numerical value "0" until the instruction period starts again.

According to the above configuration, the game stops when the total number of medals awarded at one time reaches 19,000 (so-called "stopping"). Therefore, the inconvenience that the total number of medals awarded at one time becomes excessive is suppressed. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the state in which it is possible to proceed with the game may be simply referred to as the "playable state." Further, a state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game may be simply referred to as a "game stop state." The above-mentioned complete state is included in the game stop state.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a game enabled state and a game stopped state. As shown in FIG. 15(b), the playable state includes a normal state, a pre-notification state, and a standby state. In this embodiment, the gameable state immediately after the power is turned on is, in principle, the normal state. The normal state is a game-enabled state in which the MY counter Cmy has not yet reached the numerical value "18500". When the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500" in the normal state, the state shifts to the advance notification state (arrow (A) in FIG. 15(b)).

In the advance notification state, advance notification (see FIG. 17(a) to be described later) is performed to notify in advance that the state will transition to the complete state. As described above, when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000", the state shifts to the complete state. Therefore, the advance notification of this embodiment can be said to start from the time when the remaining number of medals (net increase number) before transitioning to the complete state reaches 500.

Specifically, when the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500", the main CPU 301 changes the advance notification flag Fj from the OFF state to the ON state. The advance notification flag Fj described above is stored in the main RAM 303 and is maintained in the ON state until the state transitions to the complete state. However, if the power is turned off/on before transitioning to the complete state, the MY counter Cmy is initialized and the advance notification flag Fj is turned off. In the above cases, the normal state is restored when the power is turned on.

Note that, after transitioning to the advance notification state, the configuration may be such that the transition from the advance notification state to the normal state is triggered when the MY counter Cmy decreases to a predetermined threshold value (for example, a numerical value "18450"). In the above configuration, when the MY counter Cmy decreases to the numerical value "18450", the advance notification flag Fj is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Further, when the MY counter Cmy decreases below the numerical value "18450" and then reaches the numerical value "18500" again, the normal state shifts to the advance notification state again.

In the advance notification state, when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000", the game shifts to the complete state of the game stop state (arrow (B) in FIG. 15(b)). When transitioning to the complete state, complete notification is executed instead of advance notification. The complete notification is to notify that the game has moved to the complete state (game stop state) (see FIG. 17(c) described later).

Specifically, when the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "19000", the main CPU 301 changes the complete flag Fc from the OFF state to the ON state. The above complete flag Fc is stored in the main RAM 303 and maintained in the ON state until the setting change process is completed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the complete flag Fc is initialized in the clearing process (see also a modification described later). Note that there is a situation in which the set value is not changed during the operating period of the game hall. Therefore, it can be said that the game machine that has transitioned to the complete state will not be played during the business period of that day.

However, if the gaming state at the time when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" is the bonus operating state, it will not immediately shift to the complete state (gaming stop state) but will temporarily shift to the standby state (Fig. 15 (b) arrow (C)). The above waiting period is a game ready state. That is, if the gaming state at the time when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" is the bonus operating state, the playable state continues (extends). Specifically, if the gaming state at the time when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" is a bonus operating state, the game will be in a standby state until the bonus operating state ends, and the game will be completed when the bonus operating state ends. state (arrow (D) in FIG. 15(b)).

As shown in FIG. 15(b), the game stop state includes a complete state as well as an abnormality stop state. When a predetermined type of abnormality (for example, a sensor abnormality described below) is detected, the system then shifts to an abnormality stop state. For example, if an abnormality is detected in the playable state, the state shifts to the abnormality stop state and the game becomes impossible (arrow (E) in FIG. 15(b)). In the abnormality stop state described above, notification is given that an abnormality has been detected.

As will be described in detail later, if an abnormality is detected during the non-gaming period when the reels 12 are stopped, the system immediately shifts to the abnormality stop state. On the other hand, if an abnormality is detected during the period in which the reel 12 is fluctuating, the reel 12 does not immediately shift to the abnormality stop state. In the above case, after all the reels 12 have stopped, the state shifts to the abnormal stop state. Furthermore, depending on the type of abnormality detected, the system does not shift to the abnormality stop state. For example, if the above-mentioned door abnormality is detected, the game-enabled state continues without transitioning to the abnormality stop state.

In this embodiment, various abnormalities are detected even in the complete state. Furthermore, when an abnormality is detected in the complete state, the game shifts to the abnormality stop state (arrow (F) in FIG. 15(b)), similar to when an abnormality is detected in the game-enabled state. Assume a configuration in which no abnormality is detected in the complete state (a configuration in which there is no transition from the complete state to the abnormality stop state). In the above configuration, even if a fraudulent act (for example, an act of illegally removing a sensor) is performed in the complete state, the administrator is likely to be unable to recognize the fraudulent act. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that this inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining various processes executed in the normal state, advance notification state, standby state, and complete state. As will be described in detail later, some processing is not executed in the complete state in order to stop the progress of the game.

The "medal acceptance process" in FIG. 16 means the process of the main CPU 301 for detecting medals inserted into the medal insertion unit 8 and adding bet medals or credits. The "medal settlement process" shown in FIG. 16 refers to a process performed by the main CPU 301 to refund medals stored as bet medals or credits to the player. "Cmy update process" means the process of the main CPU 301 for updating the above-mentioned MY counter Cmy. "Instruction function related processing" means all processing related to the instruction function executed by the main CPU 301. For example, the instruction function-related processes include updating the difference number counter (advantageous section control processing), updating the advantageous section counter, advantageous section transition processing (processing during the non-advantageous section), cycle start processing, and battle start processing. , AT continuation processing, and AT termination processing.

"Abnormality-related processing" in FIG. 16 refers to processing for detecting an abnormality and processing of the main CPU 301 for transitioning to an abnormality stop state when an abnormality is detected. “External output processing” refers to processing performed by the main CPU 301 for transmitting a predetermined external signal to the outside of the gaming machine 1. “Setting confirmation processing” refers to processing performed by the main CPU 301 to shift to a setting confirmation mode when a setting key is operated and to display setting values on the setting display section 36. The "menu display process" is a process of the sub CPU 412 for displaying the above-mentioned menu image on the liquid crystal display device 30 and accepting various operations (such as an operation for recording the game history described later) via the menu image. means.

In the normal state, all of the processes shown in FIG. 16 are executed. The same applies to the advance notification state. Specifically, the processes that can be executed by the main CPU 301 are in principle common in the normal state and the advance notification state. For example, common instruction function related processing is executed in the normal state and the advance notification state. That is, in the normal state and the advance notification state, instruction function related processing is executed using a common lottery table or the like. In the above configuration, the probability of winning in the AT state does not change between the normal state and the advance notification state.

The standby state has the same processing that can be executed by the main CPU 301 as the normal state, except that the Cmy update processing is not executed. In this embodiment, once the standby state is entered, the state is entered into the complete state upon completion of the bonus operating state, regardless of the number of medals subsequently acquired. Therefore, there is no need to update the MY counter Cmy in the standby state. According to this embodiment in which the Cmy update process is canceled in the standby state, there is an advantage that unnecessary processing in the standby state can be omitted. However, the configuration may be such that the MY counter Cmy can be updated even in the standby state.

In the normal state and the standby state, common instruction function related processing is executed. Specifically, in the normal state and the standby state, instruction function related processing is executed using a common lottery table or the like. In addition, when the standby state ends, the state shifts to the complete state regardless of the ball release state. Therefore, there is a situation in which a situation may arise in which a state shifts to the complete state immediately after winning the AT state in the standby state. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which the instruction function-related process itself is canceled in the standby state. However, in the above configuration, for example, the effect notifying that the AT state has been won is not executed, and the interest of the effect in the standby state is reduced. Therefore, a configuration (for example, this embodiment) in which instruction function related processing is executed even in a standby state is preferable.

As shown in FIG. 16, abnormality-related processing is executed even in the complete state. Specifically, when an abnormality is detected in the complete state, the state shifts to the abnormality stop state. Furthermore, when the state changes from the complete state to the abnormal stop state, notification that an abnormality has been detected (hereinafter referred to as "abnormal time notification") is executed, as in the case of transition from the playable state to the abnormal stop state. Note that the type of abnormality for which the abnormality notification is executed may be configured to change between the playable state and the complete state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which when the door abnormality described above is detected in the game ready state, the abnormal time notification is executed, and when it is detected in the complete state, the abnormal time notification is not performed.

In the complete state, external output processing is executed as in the normal state. For example, if an abnormality is detected, a predetermined security signal is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Immediately after transitioning to the complete state, the above-mentioned security signal is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 25, which will be described later). As in the case of transitioning to the complete state, a security signal is transmitted to the outside of gaming machine 1 when transitioning to the advance notification state (see the figure). Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to transmit a predetermined command (gaming interruption command) to the test device upon transition to the advance notification state (see the figure). Even if a configuration is adopted in which abnormality notification is not executed when a door abnormality is detected in the complete state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a security signal is transmitted when a door abnormality is detected in the complete state. It is.

In the complete state, setting confirmation processing is executed as in the normal state. Assume a configuration in which the setting confirmation process is not executed in the complete state. That is, in the complete state, a configuration is assumed in which the current setting value cannot be confirmed even if the setting key is operated. With the above configuration, there may be an inconvenience that the set value cannot be accurately grasped when transitioning to the complete state. According to this embodiment, the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed. Note that in the abnormal stop state, the setting confirmation process is executed in response to the operation of the setting key, similar to the complete state.

In the complete state, menu-related processing is executed as in the normal state. Assume a configuration in which menu-related processing is not executed in the complete state. With the above configuration, there arises a problem that the game history, which will be described later, cannot be recorded during the period after the transition to the complete state. According to this embodiment, the above disadvantages can be suppressed. Note that menu-related processing is not executed in the abnormal stop state. Specifically, in the abnormal stop state, the operation of the effect button 26 is disabled and the menu image is not displayed. Note that a configuration may also be adopted in which menu-related processing is not executed even in the complete state.

As shown in FIG. 16, the medal acceptance process is not executed in the complete state. Therefore, it is not possible to set bet medals for starting a new game. Therefore, a new game cannot be started in the complete state. Also, immediately after the transition to the complete state, the credit medals will be automatically settled. In the complete state after the medals have been automatically settled, since no new medals to be settled are accepted in the first place, the medal settlement process is never executed. Similarly, since the game cannot be executed in the complete state, neither the Cmy update process nor the instruction function related process executed in each game is executed.

FIG. 17(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of advance notification. FIG. 17A shows a mock diagram of each image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the advance notification state.

FIG. 17(a) shows a specific example of each image when the ball is in the AT state. In the game-enabled state, a game image is displayed over substantially the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 30. As shown in FIG. 17(a), in the AT state, the AT image Ga among the images during the game is displayed. The AT image Ga displays, for example, a character animation (such as an animation suggesting a winning area) and various information (such as the remaining number of games in the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state, etc.). Further, in the AT state, the instruction image Gs may be displayed on the front side of the AT image Ga. As described above, in the AT state (instruction period), the notification effect X (1 to 4) is executed to notify the correct pressing order of the batting order bell (see FIG. 13). The instruction image Gs is displayed in the notification effect X to notify the correct pressing order of the batting order bell. FIG. 17(a) assumes a notification effect X1 in which the pressing order of "center left and right" is notified.

The above images (Ga, Gs) are also displayed in the normal state before shifting to the advance notification state. On the other hand, in the advance notification state, as shown in FIG. 17(a), the advance notification image Gj is displayed in addition to each image displayed in the normal state. The above-mentioned advance notification image Gj is an image for notifying that the advance notification state is in effect, and should not be displayed in principle throughout the advance notification state. Further, the advance notification image Gj notifies the number of remaining medals until the transition to the complete state. For example, if the number of medals remaining before transitioning to the complete state is 500, as shown in FIG. 17(a), the character string "500 medals until complete function is activated" is displayed on the advance notification image Gj. The display mode of the advance notification image Gj described above changes depending on the number of remaining medals until the transition to the complete state.

FIG. 17(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the display mode of the advance notification image Gj changes. The display mode of the advance notification image Gj changes depending on the value of the MY counter Cmy. For example, if the remaining number of medals (net increase number) before transitioning to the complete state is 500, that is, if the MY counter Cmy is the value "18500", the character string "500 medals until complete function activation" is displayed as described above. It is displayed on the advance notification image Gj. Also, when the MY counter Cmy is added from the numerical value "18500" to the numerical value "18505" (when an 8-card winning combination is won in a 3-card bet game), the number of remaining medals before moving to the complete state becomes 495. . In the above case, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the character string "495 sheets until the complete function is activated" is displayed in the advance notification image Gj instead of the character string "500 sheets until the complete function is activated."

After that, when the MY counter Cmy is subtracted from the numerical value "18505" to the numerical value "18503" (when a 1-card winning combination is won in a 3-card bet game), the number of remaining medals until the transition to the complete state becomes 497. . In the above case, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the character string "497 images until the complete function is activated" is displayed in the advance notification image Gj instead of the character string "495 images until the complete function is activated." The display mode of the advance notification image Gj changes in each game until the transition to the complete state.

As understood from the above description, the advance notification image Gj is an image for notifying a quantitative change in the number of remaining medals until the transition to the complete state. Therefore, according to the advance notification image Gj of this embodiment, the number of remaining medals until the transition to the complete state can be notified in detail at each time point in the advance notification state.

Let us assume a comparison example in which a quantitative change in the number of remaining medals until transition to the complete state is not reported. As an example of the above comparison, a configuration may be considered in which, instead of the advance notification image Gj, a message "Soon to be completed" is displayed throughout the advance notification state. In the above comparison example, there may be an inconvenience that the number of remaining medals until transition to the complete state cannot be grasped in detail at each point in time in the advance notification state. According to the advance notification image Gj of this embodiment, the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed, for example, compared to the above-mentioned comparative example.

FIG. 17(c) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of complete notification. FIG. 17(c) shows a mock diagram of each image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the complete state.

As shown in FIG. 17C, in the complete state, the complete image Gc is displayed over substantially the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 30. The complete image Gc is an image for notifying that the state has transitioned to the complete state. For example, the complete image Gc of this embodiment displays a message "Complete function in operation." Further, as described above, there is a situation in which a gaming machine that has transitioned to a complete state is not played until the next day. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to use a complete image Gc that not only informs that the game has entered the complete state but also that the game cannot be played until the next day. The complete image Gc of this embodiment displays the message "Today's game has ended" in addition to the message "Complete function in operation".

By the way, the sub CPU 412 of this embodiment stores the gaming history during the playable period in the sub RAM 414. The game history stored in the sub-RAM 414 includes, for example, the number of times the game transitioned to the AT state, the number of times the game transitioned to the CZ state, and the number of times the game transitioned to the CZ state, and each predetermined mission (for example, winning a strong cherry during the battle state). This includes the type of mission completed. Further, as described above, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display a menu image when the production button 26 is operated during the non-gaming period. After displaying the menu image, when the direction designation button 27 and the production button 26 are operated as appropriate, the history code is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. As the above history code, a QR code (registered trademark) that can be read by the player's mobile terminal may be adopted. The player can record the gaming history by displaying the history code and reading the history code with his or her mobile terminal when finishing the game.

In the complete state of this embodiment, a menu image is displayed in response to the operation of the production button 26, and the above-mentioned history code can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. According to the above configuration, the player can record the game history even after transitioning to the complete state. Further, as shown in FIG. 17(c), a message indicating that a menu image can be displayed by operating the effect button 26 is displayed on the complete image Gc. According to the above configuration, the inconvenience that the player fails to record the game history after transitioning to the complete state is suppressed. In addition, in the abnormal stop state, the operation of the effect button 26 is disabled and the menu image (including the history code) cannot be displayed.

FIG. 17(d) shows a mock diagram of each image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the standby state. As described above, if the gaming state when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" is the bonus operating state, the advance notification state shifts to the standby state. As shown in FIG. 17(d), in the bonus operating state of this embodiment, a bonus in-game image Gb is displayed as an in-game image. Note that the in-game image displayed in the bonus activation state may be configured to change depending on the ball output state. As for the above configuration, for example, in each ball release state, an in-game image corresponding to the ball release state may be displayed regardless of the game state (internal state, non-internal state, bonus activation state). It will be done.

In the bonus operating state of the present embodiment, a common bonus in-game image Gb is displayed in the normal state, advance notification state, and standby state. As shown in FIG. 17(d), in the standby state, the advance notification image Gj is hidden and the standby image Gt is displayed. The standby image Gt is an image for notifying that the device is in a standby state. The standby image Gt of this embodiment displays the character string "Waiting for complete function activation."

FIG. 18(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of transitioning from the normal state to the advance notification state and then to the complete state. FIG. 18A shows the sound output from the speaker at each point in time, the image displayed in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 30, whether or not the advance notification image Gj is displayed, the value of the MY counter Cmy, The state (ON/OFF) of advance notification flag Fj and the state (ON/OFF) of complete flag Fc are shown. As described above, the pre-notification flag Fj is changed from the OFF state to the ON state when the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500" that transitions to the pre-notification state. Further, the complete flag Fc is changed from the OFF state to the ON state when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" for transitioning to the complete state.

In the specific example of FIG. 18(a), it is assumed that the power is turned on at time t1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 18(a), it is assumed that the setting change operation and clear operation are not performed when the power is turned on. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 18A, it is assumed that the complete flag Fc is in the OFF state before the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the power is turned on, a startup image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The startup image is, for example, an image in which a message "power is being restored" is displayed on a black background image. The above startup image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then switches to the in-game image. Also, when the power is turned on, a startup sound is output. The startup sound may be, for example, a sound saying "Power is being restored." The above startup sound is repeatedly played a predetermined number of times.

As described above, the gaming enabled state immediately after the power is turned on is the normal state (provided that Fc=OFF). Specifically, when the power is turned on, the MY counter Cmy is initialized to a numerical value of "0" and the advance notification flag Fj is cleared to the OFF state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18(a), the MY counter Cmy at time t1 when the power is turned on becomes a value "0". Further, at time t1, the advance notification image Gj becomes non-displayed.

MY counter Cmy is updated in each game in the normal state. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 18(a), it is assumed that a game using three medals, which is the specified number, ends at time t2, and eight medals are paid out. In the above case, the value "5" is added to the MY counter Cmy at time t2.

In the specific example of FIG. 18A, it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500" at time t3. In the above case, at time t3, the advance notification flag Fj is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, the normal state is shifted to the advance notification state, and the display of the advance notification image Gj is started. In addition, in this embodiment, once the advance notification state is entered, the advance notification state is changed to the complete state or until the power is turned OFF/ON (until the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are initialized). Notification image Gj continues to be displayed. Therefore, for example, even if the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500" and then continues to decrease, the advance notification image Gj will not be hidden.

According to the above configuration, even if the MY counter Cmy is intentionally decreased after transitioning to the advance notification state (for example, by ignoring the correct pressing order of the batting order bells), the advance notification state will be changed to the advance notification state. It has the advantage that it cannot be terminated. However, after transitioning to the advance notification state, the configuration may be such that the transition from the advance notification state to the normal state is triggered when the MY counter Cmy decreases to a predetermined threshold value (for example, a numerical value "18450"). In the above configuration, when the MY counter Cmy decreases to the numerical value "18450", the advance notification flag Fj is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Then, when the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500" again, the advance notice flag Fj may be turned on again to display the advance notice image Gj again.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), in the advance notification state of the first embodiment, the advance notification image Gj is displayed on the front side of the in-game image (for example, the AT image Ga shown in FIG. 17(a) described above). Ru. The above configuration can also be said to change the notification mode (the content of the displayed image) on the liquid crystal display device 30 before and after transitioning to the advance notification state. On the other hand, the sound output from the speaker does not change before and after transitioning to the advance notification state. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 18(a), a common in-game sound is output before and after time t3 when transitioning to the advance notification state. That is, before and after shifting to the pre-notification state, the notification mode (type of output sound, volume) on the speaker becomes the same.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the notification mode of each segment display device (instruction display device 16, etc.) controlled by the main CPU 301 does not change before and after shifting to the advance notification state. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the mode of the segment display changes upon transition to the advance notification state (see a modified example of FIG. 39 described later). Note that this embodiment employs a configuration in which no special audio is played when transitioning to the advance notification state. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which, when transitioning to the advance notification state, an audio notification to that effect is output.

In the specific example of FIG. 18(a), it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "19000" at time t4. In the above case, the complete flag is changed from the OFF state to the ON state at time t4 when the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "19000". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 18(a), it is assumed that the gaming state at time t4 is other than the bonus operating state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state). In the above case, the process shifts to the complete state immediately after time t4. As described above, when the complete flag is changed to the ON state while the gaming state is in the bonus operating state, the game shifts to the standby state (the gameable state continues).

When transitioning to the complete state, a complete command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412). When the above complete command is transmitted, as shown in FIG. 18(a), the complete image Gc starts to be displayed and the advance notification image Gj is hidden. Further, when the complete command is transmitted, the sub CPU 412 outputs a complete voice. The above-mentioned complete voice may be a message such as "The complete function has been activated. Today's game is over. The medals will be automatically settled." However, a configuration may be adopted in which no special sound (for example, complete voice) is output upon transition to the complete state.

Note that, as described above, when the bonus activation state ends in the standby state, the state shifts to the complete state. When transitioning from the standby state to the complete state, a complete command is transmitted, a complete voice is output, and display of the complete image Gc is started, as in the case of transitioning from the advance notification state to the complete state.

FIG. 18(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the complete state is canceled. In this embodiment, when the above-mentioned complete flag Fc is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the complete state ends and the game shifts to the normal state (playable state). FIG. 18(b) shows each image displayed at each time, the current value of the MY counter Cmy, and the state of the complete flag Fc. In the specific example of FIG. 18(b), it is assumed that the power is cut off at time t1 in the complete state (Fc=ON), and then the power is turned on at time t2. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 18(b), it is assumed that a setting change operation is performed. In the above case, the setting change mode is entered from time t2 when the power is turned on.

In this embodiment, the state of the complete flag Fc is maintained (backed up) even during a period after the power is cut off. Further, the state of the complete flag Fc is maintained over a period from when the power is turned on until the setting change mode ends. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 18(b), it is assumed that the complete flag Fc is in the ON state at time t1 when the power is turned on. In the above case, the complete flag Fc remains ON until time t3 when the setting change mode ends.

The numerical value of the MY counter Cmy is maintained even after the transition to the complete state. In the specific example of FIG. 18(b), it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy is a value "19003" at the time of transition to the complete state. In the above case, the MY counter Cmy is maintained at the value "19003" in the complete state. Furthermore, the MY counter Cmy is retained (backed up) even during a period after the power is shut off. Further, when the setting change mode is entered upon power-on, the MY counter Cmy is maintained even in the setting change mode.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the setting change mode ends (when the setting key is operated to the non-operating position), the setting change image is switched to the in-game image. Further, when the setting change mode ends, the complete flag Fc is initialized to the OFF state. Specifically, in addition to when the setting value is changed before and after the setting change mode, even if the setting value before and after the setting change mode is the same (so-called "retype"), the complete flag Fc is Initialized. When the complete flag Fc is initialized, a transition is made to a normal state (playable state). Furthermore, when the setting change mode ends, a predetermined in-game image is displayed in place of the setting change image (hereinafter, the in-game image will be referred to as a "specific stage image").

By the way, assume a configuration in which the complete flag Fc is initialized at the time of transition to the setting change mode. In the above configuration, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode (before the start lever 24 is operated), the complete flag Fc is initialized. Therefore, compared to, for example, a configuration in which operation of the start lever 24 is essential to cancel the complete state (for example, this embodiment), there is a disadvantage that it becomes easier to illegally cancel the complete state.

Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode (before the start lever 24 is operated), the setting change mode ends, but the complete flag Fc remains ON. maintained in the state. That is, in order to clear the complete flag Fc, it is necessary to operate the start lever 24 in addition to operating the setting key. This embodiment described above has the advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. However, the complete flag Fc may be initialized at the time of transition to the setting change mode.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the setting change mode is entered upon power-on, the MY counter Cmy is initialized when the setting change mode ends. Note that the MY counter Cmy may be initialized to a numerical value of "0" before shifting to the setting change mode (immediately after the power is turned on). Alternatively, the MY counter Cmy may be initialized when the power is turned off.

FIG. 18(c) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the advance notification state is canceled. In this embodiment, when the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are initialized, the advance notification state is canceled and the state shifts to the normal state. If the setting change mode is not entered when the power is turned on, the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are initialized when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned OFF/ON, the advance notification state shifts to the normal state. FIG. 18C shows each image displayed at each time, the current value of the MY counter Cmy, the state of the advance notification flag Fj, and whether or not the advance notification image Gj is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 18(c), it is assumed that the power is cut off at time t1 after the MY counter Cmy has been incremented to the numerical value "18545". In the above specific example, the advance notification state is maintained and the advance notification image Gj is displayed until time t1 when the power is cut off. When the power is turned on at subsequent time point t2, the above-mentioned startup screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the MY counter Cmy is initialized to the numerical value "0", the advance notification flag Fj is initialized to the OFF state, the advance notification image Gj is hidden, and the normal state is started. . The in-game image immediately after the MY counter Cmy is initialized becomes the above-mentioned specific stage image.

FIG. 18(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example when the power is turned OFF/ON in the complete state. As described above with reference to FIG. 18(b), when the power is cut off in the complete state and the setting key is operated when the power is turned on thereafter, the setting change mode is entered and the complete state can be canceled. In the specific example shown in FIG. 18(d), it is assumed that the setting key is not operated when the power is turned on (the setting change mode is not entered).

In the specific example of FIG. 18(d), it is assumed that the power is cut off at time t1 in the complete state (Fc=ON) and then turned on at time t2. In the above case, the startup image is displayed for a predetermined period of time from time t2 when the power is turned on. If the complete flag Fc is in the OFF state, the normal state is entered after the power is turned on, and the startup image is switched to the in-game image. On the other hand, when the complete flag Fc is in the ON state (for example, the specific example in FIG. 18(d)), the state transitions to the complete state after the power is turned on, and the above-mentioned complete command is sent from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412). sent to.

When the complete command is sent when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 412 executes the same process as when the complete command is sent at a time other than when the power is turned on (during a game). Specifically, when a complete command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 412 displays a complete image Gc and outputs a complete sound. Furthermore, in the complete state, the performance lamp 28 is in the complete mode. However, the startup image is displayed with priority over the complete image Gc. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18(d), a startup image is displayed immediately after the power is turned on, and then a complete image Gc is displayed. Additionally, the startup voice is output with priority over the complete voice. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18(d), the startup sound is output immediately after the power is turned on, and then the complete sound is displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the power is turned on, it is reliably notified that the device is in the complete state. Therefore, the inconvenience of the game parlor starting operations before the complete state of the gaming machine 1 is released is suppressed. Note that the complete image Gc may be displayed with priority over the startup image, and the complete audio may be output with priority over the startup audio.

FIGS. 19(a) to 19(e) are diagrams for explaining details of each image in the advance notification state. As described above, during the period from transition to the advance notification state to transition to the complete state, the advance notification image Gj is displayed with priority over the in-game image (on the front side). For example, FIG. 19(a) assumes a specific example in which the AT image Ga is displayed among the in-game images in the advance notification state. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the advance notification image Gj is displayed with priority over the AT image Ga. However, during the period from transition to the advance notification state to transition to the complete state, an image other than the in-game image (for example, the warning image Ges shown in FIG. 19(b)) may be displayed. Each image displayed in the above case will be explained in detail using FIGS. 19(b) to 19(f).

FIG. 19(b) is a simulation diagram of each image displayed when a sensor abnormality is detected in the advance notification state. As described above, the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 8 are detected by the medal sensor 34SE. The sensor abnormality is an abnormality in the medal sensor 34SE. Specifically, when the medal sensor 34SE is maintained in the ON state (object detection state) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.6 seconds), the medal flow path inside the gaming machine 1 is filled with medals. There is a high possibility that there is some stagnation (medals are stuck). In this embodiment, a sensor abnormality is detected in the above case, and the abnormality detection flag Fes is changed from an OFF state to an ON state.

Although described in detail later, in this embodiment, the abnormality determination process (first abnormality determination process) is repeatedly executed during the non-gaming period (hereinafter referred to as the "medal insertion possible period") during which medals (bet medals, credits) can be inserted. Ru. Further, the abnormality determination process (second abnormality determination process) is also executed when the last reel 12 is stopped. If the abnormality detection flag Fes is in the ON state at the time when any of the above abnormality determination processes is executed, the system shifts to the abnormality stop state. For example, when the abnormality detection flag Fes changes to the ON state (when a medal jam occurs) during the medal insertion possible period, the system immediately shifts to the abnormality stop state. On the other hand, even if the abnormality detection flag Fes is updated to the ON state during the period in which the reels 12 fluctuate, the transition to the abnormal stop state will not occur until all the reels 12 stop.

The specific example in FIG. 19(b) assumes a case where a sensor abnormality is detected in the advance notification state and the system shifts to the abnormality stop state. In the abnormal stop state described above, the warning image Ges is displayed in substantially the entire image area, as shown in FIG. 19(b). The warning image Ges is an image for notifying that a sensor abnormality has occurred. For example, a character string "sensor abnormality" is displayed on the warning image Ges. Further, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the advance notification image Gj is displayed in front of the warning image Ges. That is, in the abnormal stop state when a sensor abnormality is detected, advance notification is executed.

Note that the abnormal stop state due to sensor abnormality can be canceled by a reset operation. Further, when a reset operation is performed, each image that was displayed immediately before the transition to the abnormal stop state is displayed. For example, in the case of transition from the normal state to the abnormal stop state, when the abnormal stop state is canceled, the in-game image that was displayed immediately before the transition to the abnormal stop state is displayed. Additionally, in the case of transitioning from the advance notification state to the abnormal stop state, when the abnormal stop state is canceled, the advance notification image Gj is displayed in addition to the in-game image that was displayed immediately before the transition to the abnormal stop state. Ru.

FIG. 19(c) is a simulation diagram of each image displayed when a door abnormality is detected in the advance notification state. As described above, when the front door 3 is opened, the front door switch SW3 is turned on and a door abnormality is detected. When the main CPU 301 detects a door abnormality, it changes the abnormality detection flag Fed from the OFF state to the ON state. As described above, when a sensor abnormality is detected among the various abnormalities, the abnormality detection flag Fes is changed to the ON state, and after that, when the abnormality determination process is executed, the system shifts to the abnormality stop state. On the other hand, when a door abnormality is detected, the game does not shift to the abnormality stop state and continues to be in a game-enabled state. When a door abnormality is detected, a warning sound is output for a predetermined period of time. As the above-mentioned warning sound, a sound saying "the door is open" may be adopted.

Specifically, when a door abnormality is detected, the warning image Ged is immediately displayed regardless of whether the reel 12 is moving or not. The above warning image Ged is for notifying that the front door is open, as shown in FIG. 18(c). Furthermore, when a door abnormality is detected in the advance notification state, both the advance notification image Gj and the warning image Ged are displayed. As shown in FIG. 18(c), the warning image Ged is displayed in front of the in-game image (Ga in the example of FIG. 18(c)) at a position that does not overlap with the advance notification image Gj.

However, in the period in which the warning image Ged (door abnormality) is displayed, the in-game image may not be displayed, similar to the period in which the warning image Ges (sensor abnormality) is displayed. Note that when each abnormality is detected in the normal state, the warning image Ges and the warning image Ged are displayed in the same manner as when each abnormality is detected in the advance notification state (with a common trigger and manner). When the front door 3 is closed, the abnormality detection flag Fed is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and the door abnormality is not detected. Further, when the door abnormality is not detected, the warning image Ged is hidden. Hereinafter, the warning image Ges, the warning image Ged, and the later-described warning image Geh may be collectively referred to as a "warning image Ge."

FIG. 19(d) is a mock diagram of each image displayed when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode in the advance notification state. As described above, by operating the setting key, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode. When shifting to the setting change mode, a setting confirmation image Gk is displayed. The setting confirmation image Gk is an image for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In this embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode from the normal state, advance notification state, standby state, complete state, and abnormal stop state.

As shown in FIG. 19(d), when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode in the pre-notification state, a pre-notification image Gj is displayed in addition to the confirmation image Gk. Note that when the setting confirmation mode ends (when the setting key is returned to the non-operating position), each image that was displayed immediately before transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is displayed. For example, when transitioning from the normal state to the setting confirmation mode, after the setting confirmation mode ends, the in-game image that was displayed immediately before transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is displayed. Further, when transitioning from the advance notification state to the setting confirmation mode, after the setting confirmation mode ends, the advance notification image Gj is displayed in addition to the in-game image that was displayed immediately before transitioning to the setting confirmation mode. When transitioning from the complete state to the setting confirmation mode, a complete image Gc is displayed after the setting confirmation mode ends. When transitioning from the abnormal stop state to the setting confirmation mode, the warning image Ge that was displayed immediately before transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is displayed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 19(e) is a mock diagram of each image displayed when transitioning to the demonstration production mode in the advance notification state. In this embodiment, if no gaming operation is performed during the non-gaming period for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the mode shifts to the demonstration production mode. Specifically, when no bet medals are inserted for a predetermined non-gaming period, the mode shifts to the demonstration production mode. When shifting to the demonstration production mode, a demonstration production image Gd is displayed. The above demonstration performance image Gd is an image including a moving image of a demonstration. The demonstration performance mode can be shifted from the normal state and the advance notification state. However, it may be possible to transition from the complete state and the standby state to the demonstration production mode.

As shown in FIG. 19(e), when transitioning to the demonstration production mode in the pre-notification state, a pre-notification image Gj is displayed in addition to the demonstration production image Gd. Assume a configuration in which the advance notification image Gj is not displayed in the demonstration performance mode. With the above configuration, a new player may start playing in the demonstration production mode without knowing that the state is a pre-notification state that can transition to a complete state. In the above case, an inconvenience may arise in which the fairness of the game is impaired. According to this embodiment, since the advance notification state is notified in the demonstration performance mode, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the advance notification image Gj is not displayed in the demonstration production mode.

By the way, as described above, in the advance notification state, the advance notification image Gj is displayed on the front side of the in-game image. In addition, a plurality of types of in-game images are provided, and are switched depending on, for example, the state of balls being put out. That is, there is a situation in which the in-game image displayed on the back side of the advance notification image Gj changes. However, in the above configuration, depending on the type of the in-game image, the advance notification image Gj displayed on the front side of the in-game image may be difficult to visually recognize.

In the prior art, when a series of images in the demonstration performance mode is displayed, the in-game image is usually displayed again. However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, a new player may start playing a game during a non-gaming period in which an in-game image is displayed after each image of the demonstration production mode is displayed. In the above case, depending on the in-game image, the above-mentioned disadvantage that the advance notification image Gj is overlooked becomes apparent.

In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration in which, when transitioning to the demo production mode, the demo production mode does not end until bet medals are inserted to start a new game. . Specifically, in the demonstration production mode, a moving image of the above-mentioned demonstration, an image displaying the title of gaming machine 1, an image displaying the name of the manufacturer that sold gaming machine 1, etc. are displayed in a predetermined order. Ru. In this embodiment, once all the images in the demonstration production mode are displayed, each image in the demonstration production mode is repeatedly displayed in order from the beginning. According to the above configuration, since the in-game image is not displayed during the non-gaming period after transitioning to the demonstration production mode, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. However, during the non-gaming period, each image of the demonstration effect mode and the in-game image may be alternately displayed (the above-mentioned conventional technique may also be adopted).

FIG. 19(f) is a mock diagram of each image displayed when hopper empty is detected in the advance notification state. As described above, when a winning combination is won, medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out from the hopper 520. However, if there are no medals in the hopper 520, the medals cannot be paid out. In this embodiment, when the hopper 520 executes a medal dispensing operation and no new medals are dispensed for a predetermined period of time, hopper empty is detected. When the hopper empty is detected, the game shifts to an abnormality stop state, and a warning image Geh is displayed instead of the in-game image. As shown in FIG. 19(f), the warning image Geh displays that the hopper empty is detected.

As shown in FIG. 19(f), in the abnormal stop state when the hopper empty is detected in the advance notification state, the advance notification image Gj is not displayed. That is, when the hopper empty is detected, the advance notification image Gj is hidden. The present embodiment described above has two modes, depending on the type of detected abnormality: an abnormality stop state in which the advance notification image Gj is displayed (see FIG. 19(b)) and an abnormality stop state in which the advance notification image Gj is not displayed (see FIG. 19(b)). (see FIG. 19(f)) is also provided. Hopper empty can be resolved by performing a reset operation after replenishing the hopper 520 with medals. When the hopper empty state is resolved, the in-game image and advance notification image Gj immediately before the hopper empty state was detected are displayed.

FIGS. 20(a) to 20(d) are diagrams for explaining details of each image displayed during the period when the complete flag Fc is in the ON state. FIG. 20A is a simulated diagram of each image when no abnormality is detected while the complete flag Fc is in the ON state. In the above case, as explained using FIG. 17(c) above, the complete image Gc that notifies the user of the complete state is displayed.

FIG. 20(b) is a simulation diagram of each image when a door abnormality is detected in the complete state. In the complete state, when a door abnormality is detected, the above-mentioned warning image Ged is displayed. As shown in FIG. 20(b), the above warning image Ged is displayed on the front side of the complete image Gc. Also, immediately after transitioning to the complete state, complete audio is played back. In this embodiment, if a door abnormality is detected during the period in which the complete sound is output, the complete sound is muted and a warning sound notifying the door abnormality is output with priority.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the complete voice is output with priority over the warning voice notifying the door abnormality. Further, in the complete state, a period in which the warning image Ged is displayed and a period in which it is not displayed may be alternately repeated (blinking display). The above configuration has the advantage that the entire complete image Gc can be visually recognized even in the state where door abnormality is detected.

FIG. 20(c) is a mock diagram of each image displayed when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode in the complete state. When the setting confirmation mode is entered in the complete state, a setting confirmation image Gk is displayed instead of the complete screen Gc. That is, in the setting change mode, notification of the complete state is temporarily stopped. In the specific example of FIG. 20(c), when the setting confirmation mode ends (when the setting key is returned to the non-operating position), the complete image Gc is displayed again in place of the setting confirmation image Gk.

FIG. 20(d) is a simulated diagram of each image when a sensor abnormality is detected in the complete state. In the complete state, if a sensor abnormality is detected, the system shifts to the abnormality stop state and the above-mentioned warning image Ges is displayed. Specifically, the warning image Ges is displayed on substantially the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 30. Therefore, in the complete state, if a sensor abnormality is detected, the complete image Gc is hidden. When the abnormal stop state is canceled by a reset operation and returns to the complete state, the complete image Gc is displayed again in place of the warning image Ges.

FIG. 20(e) is a diagram for explaining a modification of this embodiment. In the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 20(d) above, the completion notification is temporarily stopped in the abnormality stop state when a sensor abnormality is detected. On the other hand, in the modified example shown in FIG. 20(e), the complete notification continues even in the abnormal stop state when a sensor abnormality is detected.

Specifically, in the modified example, a complete image Gc is displayed in the complete state, and when the complete state shifts to the abnormal stop state, a warning image Ges is displayed in place of the complete image Gc (similar to this embodiment). ). However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 20(e), in the abnormal stop state, a complete image Gcx is displayed in addition to the warning image Ges. The above complete image Gcx is an image for notifying the transition to the complete state, and is displayed on the front side of the warning image Ges. Since the complete image Gcx is smaller than the warning image Ges, both images can be visually recognized in the abnormal stop state.

Further, in the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 20(c) above, the complete notification is temporarily stopped when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, but a configuration may be adopted in which the complete notification continues in the setting confirmation mode. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the complete image Gcx described in FIG. 20(e) is displayed in the setting change mode. In addition, in this embodiment, when a door abnormality is detected, it was set as the structure which complete notification continues. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which when a door abnormality is detected, the completion notification is temporarily stopped as in the case where a sensor abnormality is detected (see FIG. 20(d)).

As described above, various abnormalities are detected in this embodiment. Furthermore, when any of the abnormalities is detected, the abnormality detection flag Fe corresponding to the abnormality is changed to the ON state. The above abnormality detection flag Fe is stored in the main RAM 303. The abnormality detection flag Fe of this embodiment includes an abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) in addition to the above-mentioned abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality) and abnormality detection flag Fed (door abnormality).

The above abnormality detection flag Fer is changed to the ON state when a RAM abnormality is detected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 checks whether each piece of information in the main RAM 303 is destroyed when the power is turned on. More specifically, each piece of information stored in the main RAM 303 when the power is cut off and the total value (check SUM) of each piece of information can be retained for a certain period of time even while the power is cut off. Then, when the power is turned on, the total value of each piece of information is calculated again. At this time, if the total value stored when the power was cut off and the total value calculated again when the power was turned on do not match, the information stored in the main RAM 303 is damaged. , and detects a RAM abnormality. If it is determined that each piece of information in the main RAM 303 has been destroyed, the main CPU 301 changes the abnormality detection flag Fer from the OFF state to the ON state.

As described above, in this embodiment, various types of information including the MY counter Cmy, the advance notification flag Fj, and the abnormality detection flag Fe (s, d, r) are stored in the main RAM 303. Further, the main RAM 303 stores a gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (non-internal state, etc.) and instruction function related information related to instructions on the instruction display 16. The above-mentioned instruction function related information includes various information including a ball release state flag indicating the current ball release state (non-advantageous section, etc.), an advantageous section counter, and a difference number counter. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the game status flag and instruction function related information (information related to gameplay) may be collectively referred to as "gaming control information".

Further, the main RAM 303 stores various types of information (see FIG. 12(a) described above) for displaying each game information (accessory object ratio, etc.) on the main display 40. Hereinafter, various types of information for displaying each game information on the main display 40 may be collectively referred to as "performance information". Each piece of information in the main RAM 303 described above is cleared (initialized) at various opportunities. However, the timing at which each piece of information is cleared may be different. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining specific examples of each opportunity for clearing each piece of information stored in the main RAM 303. FIG. 21 shows the timing at which the information is cleared for each piece of information stored in the main RAM 303. Note that, as described above, the clear operation and setting change operation include a power-on operation. Therefore, each piece of information that is cleared when the power is turned on is also cleared during a clear operation and a setting change operation.

As shown in FIG. 21, the reset operation triggers the abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality) to be cleared (changed to OFF state). In the above configuration, when a sensor abnormality is detected and the abnormality stop state is entered, the abnormality stop state can be canceled by clearing the abnormality detection flag Fes by a reset operation. On the other hand, among the pieces of information shown in FIG. 21, pieces of information other than the abnormality detection flag Fes are not cleared by the reset operation but are maintained. For example, when a reset operation is performed in the complete state, the complete flag Fc is maintained in the ON state and the complete state is not released.

As shown in FIG. 21, the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are cleared when the power is turned on. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 executes recovery processing upon power-on. In the recovery process, MY counter Cmy and advance notification flag Fj are cleared. In the above configuration, when the power is turned on, the advance notification state is canceled and the state shifts to the normal state. In this embodiment, the trigger for clearing the MY counter Cmy and the trigger for clearing the advance notification flag Fj are common. Among the pieces of information shown in FIG. 21, pieces of information other than the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are maintained without being cleared in the recovery process. For example, when the power is turned off and on in the complete state, the complete flag Fc is maintained in the ON state and the complete state is not released.

As shown in FIG. 21, the MY counter Cmy, advance notification flag Fj, abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality), and game control information are cleared by the clearing operation. In the above configuration, when a clear operation is performed, the abnormality stop state when a sensor abnormality is detected is canceled. Further, when a clear operation is performed, the gaming state shifts to a non-internal state, and each information related to the instruction function is cleared. For example, the ball dispensing state shifts to a non-advantageous section, and initial values are set in the advantageous section counter and the difference number counter.

Among the information shown in FIG. 21, each information other than the MY counter Cmy, advance notification flag Fj, abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality), and game control information is maintained without being cleared by the clearing operation. For example, when a clear operation is performed in the complete state, the complete flag Fc is maintained in the ON state and the complete state is not released.

When the setting change operation is executed, all of the information shown in FIG. 21 except the performance information is cleared. However, performance information may be cleared by setting change operations. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the type of information cleared by the setting change operation changes depending on whether the abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) is in the ON state or in the OFF state. For example, when the abnormality detection flag Fer is in the OFF state, each information other than the performance information (including the complete flag Fc) is cleared in response to a setting change operation. On the other hand, when the abnormality detection flag Fer is in the ON state, all information including performance information is cleared in response to the setting change operation. In the above configuration, the complete flag Fc is initialized to the OFF state and the complete state is released in response to the setting change operation.

As understood from the above explanation, the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are cleared when the power is turned on, while the complete state is maintained when the power is turned on. Furthermore, the complete state is not canceled by a reset operation that clears the abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality), but is canceled by a setting change operation that clears the abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality).

FIG. 22(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which each piece of information in the main RAM 303 is initialized. FIG. 22(a) shows the contents (numerical values) of each piece of information at each point in time. In addition, in FIG. 22(a), the MY counter is "Cmy", the advance notification flag is "Fj", the advantageous section counter is "Cy", the difference number counter is "Cx", the gaming status flag is "Fy", and the ball output is The status flag is shown as "Fx" and the complete flag is shown as "Fc". The same applies to FIG. 22(b-1), FIG. 22(b-2), and FIG. 22(c), which will be described later.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(a), it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "19000" at time t1 and the complete flag Fc is updated from the OFF state to the ON state. Further, it is assumed that the ball dispensing state immediately before transitioning to the complete state is the AT state, and the gaming state is the internal medium state. If the gaming state when the complete flag is updated from the OFF state to the ON state is the internal medium state (other than the bonus operating state), the game immediately shifts to the complete state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(a), it is assumed that the setting value "6" was determined in the previous setting change process.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the MY counter Cmy is maintained during the period after transition to the complete state. Further, as shown in FIG. 22(a), the advantageous section counter Cy, the difference number counter Cx, the gaming state flag Fy, and the ball output state flag Fx do not change before and after shifting to the complete state. The above information is maintained (backed up) even when the power is turned off, and is cleared when the setting change process is completed when the power is turned on.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 22(a), during the period from time t2 when the power is cut off to time t3 when the power is turned on, the advantageous section counter Cy, the difference number counter Cx, the gaming state flag Fy, and the ball output state flag Fx is backed up. Furthermore, the above information is maintained during the period from when the power is turned on until the time t4 when the setting change process ends, and the information is cleared at the time t4.

By the way, as mentioned above, the complete state is a game stop state, and the principle is not canceled until the setting change process is completed. Further, the advantageous section counter Cy, the difference number counter Cx, the game state flag Fy, and the ball output state flag Fx are cleared when the setting change process is completed. That is, the above information will not be referenced in the game until it is cleared during the period after the transition to the complete state. Therefore, even if the above information is cleared at the time of transition to the complete state, there is no disadvantage to the player. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section counter Cy, the difference number counter Cx, the game state flag Fy, and the ball output state flag Fx are cleared upon transition to the complete state.

However, the more opportunities the advantageous section counter Cy, difference number counter Cx, gaming status flag Fy, and ball output status flag Fx are cleared, the more likely the above information will be cleared unintentionally (due to malfunction, etc.) There is a situation. Therefore, it is better not to unnecessarily increase the number of opportunities for clearing each of the above information. Specifically, a configuration (for example, this embodiment) in which the above-mentioned information is not cleared except for an opportunity to move to a non-advantageous section except for an operation (such as a clear operation) by the administrator of the gaming machine 1 is preferable. .

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the set value is maintained before and after transitioning to the complete state. Note that when the game transitions to the complete state, the game does not transition to the playable state until the set value is changed. Therefore, the set value at the time of transition to the complete state will not be referenced in the game thereafter. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting values are initialized at the time of transition to the complete state. However, with the above configuration, there is a situation in which the set value cannot be confirmed in the complete state. In this embodiment, the setting value at the time of transition to the complete state is maintained during the period from transition to the complete state until the setting change process is completed. Therefore, there is an advantage that the set value can be confirmed even in the complete state.

FIG. 22(b-1) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which each piece of information in the main RAM 303 is initialized. In the specific example of FIG. 22(b-1), it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "19000" at time t1 and the complete flag is updated from the OFF state to the ON state (see FIG. 22(a) same as). Further, it is assumed that the ball dispensing state immediately before transitioning to the complete state is the in-cycle state, and the gaming state is the bonus operating state. If the gaming state when the complete flag is updated from the OFF state to the ON state is the bonus operating state, the game shifts to the standby state.

As described above, the standby state is a game ready state, medals are used in each game, and medals are paid out. However, as shown in FIG. 22(b-1), in the standby state, the MY counter Cmy is maintained without being updated. Further, in this embodiment, the maximum value added to the MY counter Cmy in one game is the numerical value "5". In the above configuration, the maximum value of MY counter Cmy is the numerical value "19004". Therefore, it is sufficient for the MY counter Cmy to have a data size that can count the numerical value "19004".

Assume a configuration in which the MY counter Cmy is updated in the standby state. In the above configuration, the maximum value of the MY counter Cmy needs to be larger than the numerical value "19004". As understood from the above description, according to the present embodiment in which updating of the MY counter Cmy is stopped upon transition to the standby state, there is an advantage that the data size of the MY counter Cmy can be reduced. However, the configuration may be such that the MY counter Cmy is updated in the standby state.

In this embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function (including update processing of Cy, Cx, etc.) is common before and after transitioning to the standby state. In the present embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 22(b-1), the advantageous section counter Cy and the difference number counter Cx are updated even in the period after transitioning to the standby state (same as in the normal state and advance notification state). ). Also, the ball output state can change even in the standby state.

FIG. 22(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which each piece of information in the main RAM 303 is initialized. In the specific example of FIG. 22(b-1) described above, it is assumed that the power is cut off in the standby state, and then the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on. In the specific example of FIG. 22(b-2), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the complete state after the standby state ends, and then the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on.

Specifically, FIG. 22(b-2) assumes a case where, in the bonus operating state before time t1, the complete flag Fc is changed to the ON state and the state shifts to the standby state. Further, FIG. 22(b-2) assumes a case where the bonus operating state ends at time t1 and the state shifts to the non-internal medium state. In the above case, at time t1, the standby state shifts to the complete state. Further, FIG. 22(b-2) assumes a case where the power is cut off at time t2, and then the power is turned on at time t3 to transition to the setting change mode. As shown in FIG. 22(b-2), each piece of information including the MY counter Cmy is maintained during the period from time t1 to time t3 and thereafter. In the specific example of FIG. 22(b-2), it is assumed that the setting change mode ends at time t4. In the above case, each piece of information including the MY counter Cmy is initialized at time t4.

FIG. 22(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which each piece of information in the main RAM 303 is initialized. In the specific example of FIG. 22(c), it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "19000" at time t1 and the complete flag is updated from the OFF state to the ON state (see FIG. 22(a) and FIG. 22(b-1)). In the above case, the game shifts to a complete state or a standby state depending on the gaming state (bonus operating state or not) at time t1.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(c), it is assumed that the power is cut off at time t2 in the complete state or standby state, and then the power is turned on at time t3. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(c), it is assumed that the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 22(c), the complete flag Fc is maintained in the ON state after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming state at the time of power cut-off is maintained, and when the power is turned on thereafter, the game state shifts to a complete state or a standby state depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, when the complete flag Fc is in the ON state when the power is turned on, the system shifts to the standby state in the bonus operating state, and shifts to the complete state in other than the bonus operating state. As described above, the clear operation does not clear the complete flag Fc, but the gaming state becomes a non-internal state. Therefore, when the clear operation is executed, even if the device is in the standby state when the power is turned off, it shifts to the complete state. Assume a configuration in which the complete flag Fc is cleared by a clearing operation (for example, a modified example described later). In the above configuration, even if it is in the standby state when the power is cut off, the clearing operation shifts it to the normal state.

In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, even if the complete flag Fc is not cleared, the MY counter Cmy is cleared. The above configuration has the advantage that the processing is simpler than a configuration in which the MY counter Cmy may or may not be cleared depending on the complete flag Fc when the power is turned on. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the MY counter Cmy is not cleared when the power is turned on during the period when the complete flag Fc is in the ON state. Specifically, when the power is turned on, a startup process (recovery initialization process), which will be described later, is executed (see FIGS. 26(a) and 26(c)). In the above recovery initialization process, the MY counter Cmy is initialized. In the above configuration, when the complete flag Fc is in the OFF state, the MY counter Cmy is initialized in the initialization process at the time of recovery, while when the complete flag Fc is in the ON state, the MY counter Cmy is initialized in the initialization process at the time of recovery. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is not done.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a period during which advance notification is performed. FIG. 23(a) shows the presence or absence of the advance notification image Gj at each time point. In addition, FIG. 23(a) shows the state (ON/OFF) of the abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality) at each time point, the sound output at each time point, the lighting mode of the production lamp 28 at each time point, and the , an image displayed in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 30 and the numerical value of the MY counter Cmy are shown.

Further, FIG. 23(a) shows a period in which the reels 12 fluctuate and a period in which they stop. In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that a game start operation is executed and each reel 12 is started at time t1. Further, assume that the state has been shifted to the advance notification state before time t1. In the above case, the advance notification image Gj is continuously displayed over the period before and after time t1. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the in-game image is displayed from time t1, the in-game sound corresponding to the in-game image is output, and the production lamp 28 is lit in the in-game mode corresponding to the in-game image. do. In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the sensor is not in an abnormality detection state (Fes=OFF) at time t1.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that a sensor abnormality occurs and the abnormality detection flag Fes is changed from the OFF state to the ON state at time t2 when each reel 12 is fluctuating. As described above, when the abnormality detection flag Fes changes to the ON state during the medal insertion period when each reel 12 is stopped, the system immediately shifts to the abnormality stop state. Furthermore, during the period when each reel 12 is stopped, if a sensor abnormality is detected, a warning image Ges is immediately displayed instead of the in-game image (see FIG. 19(b)). On the other hand, if the abnormality detection flag Fes is updated to the ON state during the period in which the reels 12 fluctuate (for example, the specific example in FIG. 23(a)), the transition to the abnormal stop state will not occur until all the reels 12 stop. .

By the way, conventionally, when a sensor abnormality is detected during a period in which each reel 12 is fluctuating, a technology has been developed that immediately displays a warning image Ges instead of the in-game image, and displays a message such as "Please stop the reels", for example. It has been known. In the conventional technology described above, the warning image Ges is usually displayed in priority over all other images (on the front side). When the advance notification image Gj is adopted in the above conventional technology, the warning image Ges is displayed in front of the advance notification image Gj. Therefore, from the time when the sensor abnormality is detected during the fluctuation of each reel 12, the advance notification image Gj cannot be visually recognized due to the warning image Ges.

However, the period from the time when sensor abnormality is detected during the fluctuation of each reel 12 to the time when all reels 12 stop is a period during which gaming (stopping operation) is possible, although it is a short time. Further, from the viewpoint of ensuring the fairness of the game, it is preferable that the advance notification image Gj be displayed during all periods in which the game is possible. Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, in the period from time t2 when a sensor abnormality is detected to time t3 when all reels 12 stop, the advance notification image Gj is changed as in the period before time t2. The configuration shown was adopted.

In addition, in the prior art, the prior notification image Gj may be displayed on the front side of the warning image Ges while each reel 12 is changing by deliberately lowering the priority of the warning image Ges. However, in the above configuration, there may be a problem that the visibility of the advance notification image Gj is reduced due to the warning image Ges.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, even if a sensor abnormality is detected during fluctuation of each reel 12, until all reels 12 stop (until transition to abnormal stop state) adopted a configuration in which the warning image Ges is not displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23(a), during the period from time t2 when a sensor abnormality is detected to time t3 when all reels 12 stop, the in-game image changes as in the period before time t2. The configuration shown was adopted. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the period from time t2 when a sensor abnormality is detected to time t3 when all reels 12 stop, the performance lamp 28 is lit in a gaming mode as in the period before time t2. , adopted a configuration that outputs sound during the game. In this embodiment, during the period after the sensor abnormality is detected while the reels 12 are rotating, the in-game image is displayed, the production lamp 28 lights up in a warning mode, and a warning sound is output. It may also be a configuration.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), if the abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality) is in the ON state at time t3 when all the reels 12 have stopped, the state shifts to the abnormality stop state. Further, when the game shifts to the abnormal stop state, a warning sound is output, the performance lamp 28 is set to a warning mode, and a warning image Ges is displayed in place of the in-game image. As shown in FIG. 23(a), when the advance notification state shifts to the abnormality stop state, the advance notification image Gj is continuously displayed. According to the above configuration, it is possible to know that the transition to the pre-notification state has been completed in the abnormal stop state.

By the way, as mentioned above, the abnormal stop state when a sensor abnormality is detected can be canceled by a reset operation (no need to turn the power OFF/ON) or a clear operation (necessary to turn the power OFF/ON). can. However, while the reset operation maintains the advance notification state, the clear operation ends the advance notification state. Assume a configuration in which advance notification is not performed (advance notification image Gj is not displayed) in the abnormal stop state. With the above configuration, there may be an inconvenience that the administrator of the gaming machine 1 (the clerk at the gaming parlor) ends the advance notification state by performing a clear operation when canceling the abnormal stop state. In this embodiment, since the advance notification image Gj is displayed in the abnormal stop state when a sensor abnormality is detected, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that a symbol combination of 8 bells stops on the active line at time t3. As will be described in detail later, when a winning combination is won, the MY counter Cmy is incremented after credit addition processing or processing for causing the hopper 520 to execute a payout operation (hereinafter collectively referred to as "payout processing") is completed. However, if a sensor abnormality is detected while the reels 12 are fluctuating, the system shifts to an abnormality stop state before the payout process is started. In the above configuration, if a sensor abnormality is detected while the reels 12 are fluctuating, the MY counter Cmy is not updated until the abnormality stop state is canceled, regardless of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), after the symbol combination of eight bells stops on the active line at time t3, it transitions to an abnormal stop state, and the abnormal stop state is canceled at time t4 by a reset operation. Assume a case. In the above case, the payout process is started at time t4 and completed at time t5. Further, at time t5, a numerical value "5" is added to the MY counter Cmy. In addition, in FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy is added from the numerical value "N" to the numerical value "N+5". The numerical value "N+5" is less than the threshold value "19000" for transition to the complete state (N+5<19000). Therefore, in the specific example of FIG. 23(a), there is no transition to the complete state at time 5.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), at time t4 when the abnormality stop state is released, the warning image Ges is switched to the in-game image, the in-game sound is output, and the effect lamp 28 becomes in the in-game mode. In addition, instead of the time t4 when the abnormality stop state is canceled, from the time t5 when the payout process is completed, the in-game image is displayed, the in-game sound is output, and the production lamp 28 is set to the in-game mode. Good too. In the above configuration, the warning image Ges is displayed, the warning sound is output, and the performance lamp 28 is lit in a warning mode during the period from time t4 to time t5.

FIG. 23(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which advance notification is performed. Similar to FIG. 23(b) described above, FIG. 23(b) shows whether or not the advance notification image Gj is displayed at each point in time. Further, FIG. 23(b) shows the state (ON, OFF) of the complete flag Fc at each point in time.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(b), it is assumed that the game is started in the AT state and the fluctuations of each reel 12 are started from time t1. Further, as in the specific example of FIG. 23(a) described above, assume that the state has been shifted to the advance notification state before time t1. In the above case, the advance notification image Gj is continuously displayed over the period before and after time t1. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the AT state, the AT image Ga (see FIG. 17(a) above) is displayed as the game image, the AT music is output, and the production lamp 28 is set to the AT mode. become. Also, assume that at time t1, the sensor is not in a detection state of abnormality (Fes=OFF).

In the specific example of FIG. 23(b), similar to the specific example of FIG. 23(a) described above, a sensor abnormality occurs at time t2 when each reel 12 is fluctuating, and the abnormality detection flag Fes changes from the OFF state to the ON state. Assume that the state is changed. As mentioned above, even if the abnormality detection flag Fes is changed to the ON state, the stop operation is possible, and the game image from before the abnormality detection flag Fes was changed to the ON state will continue to be displayed. Ru. Specifically, as described above, in the AT state, the correct pressing order of the eight bells is instructed by the instruction image Gs (see FIG. 17(a)). Each image including the instruction image Gs described above continues to be displayed even after time t2 when the abnormality detection flag Fes is changed to the ON state.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(b), it is assumed that a stop operation is executed according to the instruction of the instruction image Gs, and a symbol combination of eight bells is stopped and displayed at time t3. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 23(b), it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy is a numerical value "18995" at the game start time t1. In the above case, if no sensor abnormality is detected during the period in which each reel 12 fluctuates, the payout process is executed immediately after each reel 12 stops, and the MY counter Cmy is added to the threshold value "19000". That is, if no sensor abnormality is detected during the period in which each reel 12 fluctuates, the state shifts to the complete state immediately after time t3 when each reel 12 stops.

However, if a sensor abnormality is detected during the period in which the reels 12 fluctuate, the payout process is not executed and the system shifts to an abnormality stop state. In the specific example of FIG. 23(b), immediately after the time t3 when the 8-card symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the abnormal stop state, and the payout process is not executed. In the above case, the MY counter Cmy is not incremented even though the 8-card symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(b), similar to the specific example of FIG. 23(a) described above, a warning image Ged is displayed from time t3 when all reels 12 have stopped, a warning sound is output, and a production lamp is displayed. 28 is a warning mode. Further, since the MY counter Cmy is not incremented until the abnormality stop state is canceled, the complete flag Fc is maintained in the OFF state. In the specific example of FIG. 23(b), it is assumed that the abnormal stop state is canceled by a reset operation at time t4. In the above case, the payout process starts from time t4. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 23(a), the payout process ends at time t5, the MY counter Cmy is added to the threshold value "19000", and the state shifts to the complete state.

Even if a sensor abnormality is detected during a game (while the reels are changing), a configuration is assumed in which the system shifts to an abnormality stop state after the payout process is executed. In the above configuration, there is a case where the state immediately shifts to the complete state after the abnormal stop state is released. In the above case, the player who has already been awarded medals can leave the gaming machine 1 in the abnormal stop state and end the game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, even in a game that transitions to a complete state, medals are not paid out until the abnormal stop state is canceled. Therefore, there is an advantage that the inconvenience of leaving the gaming machine 1 in an abnormally stopped state is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), even if the state is shifted to the complete state immediately after the abnormal stop state is canceled, the warning image Ged is temporarily switched to the AT image Ga (gaming image), and then, A complete image Gc is displayed. Immediately after the abnormal stop state is released, the AT music (playing sound) is temporarily output, and then the complete sound is output. Similarly, immediately after the abnormal stop state is released, the effect lamp 28 is once controlled to the AT mode (game mode) and then to the complete mode.

Instead of the present embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the complete image Gc is displayed immediately after (substantially at the same time) the time t4 when the abnormal stop state is released. As the above configuration, a configuration in which a sub MY counter is provided in the sub control board 400 (sub RAM 414) can be considered. The sub-MY counter described above, like the MY counter Cmy, counts the net increase in the number of medals in each game. For example, when a display winning combination command indicating 8 bells is received, the numerical value "5" is added to the sub-MY counter. In the above configuration, the sub MY counter is added to the threshold value "19000" immediately after time t4 (before MY counter Cmy is added). The sub CPU 412 displays the complete image Gc immediately after the sub MY counter is added to the threshold value "19000".

However, in a configuration in which the complete image Gc is displayed immediately after time t4 when the abnormal stop state is released, the image that would normally be displayed during the payout process (for example, the character string "Obtain 8 coins!" images) are not displayed. Therefore, some players may experience inconveniences that they may feel dissatisfied with. According to this embodiment, since the in-game image is once displayed immediately after time t4, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which advance notification is performed. FIG. 24 assumes a specific example where a door abnormality is detected in the advance notification state. As described above, when a door abnormality is detected, the abnormality detection flag Fed is changed to the ON state. FIG. 24 shows the abnormality detection flag Fed at each point in time. FIG. 24 also shows the sound output at each time point, the lighting mode of the production lamp 28 at each time point, the presence or absence of a warning image Ged, the presence or absence of a preliminary notification image Gj, and the liquid crystal display device 30 at each time point. The image displayed in the entire display area and the numerical value of the MY counter Cmy are shown.

Further, FIG. 24 shows a period in which the reels 12 fluctuate and a period in which they stop. In the specific example of FIG. 24, it is assumed that a game start operation is executed and the reels 12 are started at time t1. Further, assume that at time t1, the door abnormality is not detected (Fed=OFF). In the above case, the warning image Ged (see FIG. 20(b) described above) is hidden at time t1. Further, an in-game image in the game started from time t1 is displayed, an in-game sound corresponding to the in-game image is output, and the performance lamp 28 is lit in a manner corresponding to the in-game image.

In the specific example of FIG. 24, it is assumed that the state has been shifted to the advance notification state before time t1. In the above case, the advance notification image Gj is continuously displayed before and after time t1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 24, it is assumed that a door abnormality is detected at time t2 when each reel 12 changes. In the above case, the abnormality detection flag Fed is changed from the OFF state to the ON state from time t2 when the door abnormality is detected.

In this embodiment, when a door abnormality is detected, the warning image Ged is immediately displayed regardless of whether each reel 12 is stopped or fluctuating. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 24, the warning image Ged is displayed on the front side of the in-game image from time t2 when the door abnormality is detected. However, the warning image Ged is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the advance notification image Gj. According to the above configuration, the inconvenience that the advance notification image Gj becomes difficult to visually recognize as the warning image Ged is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 24, a warning sound is output in place of the game sound from time t2 when a door abnormality is detected. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the in-game sound and the warning sound are output in parallel. In the above case, it is preferable that the volume of the sound during the game is reduced when the output of the warning sound is started. Further, from time t2 when a door abnormality is detected, the performance lamp 28 lights up in a warning mode.

As described above, the door abnormality detection state (Fed=ON) becomes the game ready state. Therefore, even if a door abnormality is detected during the movement of the reels 12, the system will not shift to the abnormality stop state when all the reels 12 stop. In the specific example of FIG. 24, it is assumed that all reels 12 stop at time t3. In the above case, the payout process is executed from time t3, and the MY counter Cmy is incremented. In the specific example of FIG. 24, it is assumed that 8 bells are won and the value "5" is added to the MY counter Cmy.

According to the above-described embodiment, when 19,000 medals are awarded to a player at once, the state shifts to a complete state, and the game is forcibly stopped in the middle of the game (during business hours of the game hall). . Therefore, compared to, for example, a configuration that does not include a complete state, the inconvenience that too many medals are awarded to a player at one time is suppressed.

By the way, let us assume that even if the gaming machine 1 shifts to the complete state during business hours of the gaming parlor, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 will not be aware of this fact. In the above case, the administrator may be inconvenienced in that he or she cannot understand the reason why games are not played on the gaming machine 1. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the administrator of the gaming machine 1 is clearly notified of the transition to the complete state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is tested to see whether it satisfies predetermined standards. The above test is conducted by connecting the gaming machine 1 to a testing device. Furthermore, in the above test, the game automatically progresses in the game machine 1 by communicating with the game machine 1 and the test device via the interface board. Assume that the state transitions to the complete state during the test. In the above case, there is an inconvenience that the test cannot be continued. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the gaming machine 1 notifies the test device immediately before transitioning to the complete state.

In consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, this embodiment employs configurations that can suppress the above-mentioned disadvantages. Specifically, a configuration was adopted in which when the game machine 1 transitions to the complete state, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 is clearly notified of this fact. In addition, a configuration is adopted in which the gaming machine 1 notifies the testing device immediately before transitioning to the complete state. Each of the above configurations will be explained in detail using FIG. 25 below.

FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an external signal and an external command transmitted from the gaming machine 1 to the outside. FIG. 25 shows a period in which an external signal is in an ON state and a period in which an external command is in an ON state.

The above external commands are sent to the above-mentioned test device. In the specific example of FIG. 25, it is assumed that the gaming machine 1 is connected to a test device. Further, the external signal is transmitted to a management device (hall computer) for managing the gaming machine 1. For example, a game interruption command, which will be described later, is transmitted as an external command. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 transmits external signals including an AT signal and a security signal. The AT signal is transmitted in the AT state. When the AT signal is received by the management device, the administrator is notified that the gaming machine 1 is in the AT state. The security signal is transmitted, for example, when an abnormality is detected. As will be explained in detail below, the security signal is also transmitted upon transition to the pre-notification state and upon transition to the complete state.

In the specific example of FIG. 25, it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500" at time t1 in the AT state, and the state shifts from the normal state to the advance notification state. In the above case, the AT signal is in the ON state before and after time t1. Further, the security signal changes from the OFF state to the ON state for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) from time t1 when the pre-notification state is started. According to the above configuration, it becomes possible for the management device to notify that the state has shifted to the advance notification state.

In this embodiment, the game interruption command changes from the OFF state to the ON state at the trigger when the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18500" (the trigger to shift to the advance notification state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the advance notification flag Fj is in the ON state in the advance notification state. The main CPU 301 maintains the game interruption signal in the ON state during the period in which the advance notification flag Fj is in the ON state, and maintains the game interruption signal in the OFF state during the period in which the advance notification flag Fj is in the OFF state. That is, the main CPU 301 controls the state of the game interruption signal with reference to the advance notification flag Fj.

According to the above configuration, by interrupting the test when the test device detects that the game interrupt signal has changed to the ON state, it is possible to prevent the test from shifting to the complete state during the test. For example, when the test interruption signal changes to the ON state, the test can be continued without shifting to the complete state by turning off/on the power of the gaming machine 1 and clearing the MY counter Cmy. Further, by turning off/on the power of the gaming machine 1, the advance notification flag Fj is cleared and the game interruption command is turned off.

Note that the trigger for the game interruption command to turn on is not limited to the trigger for transitioning to the advance notification state. For example, the game interruption command may be turned on when the MY counter Cmy reaches the numerical value "18900". Further, the main CPU 301 of this embodiment changed the game interruption command from the OFF state to the ON state with reference to the advance notification flag Fj. However, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the MY counter Cmy is equal to or greater than the numerical value "18500" (hereinafter referred to as "comparative example"). In the above comparative example, when it is determined that the MY counter Cmy has reached the numerical value "18500", the main CPU 301 changes the game interruption command from the OFF state to the ON state.

In the above comparison example, similarly to the present embodiment, the game interruption command is turned on when transitioning to the advance notification state. Further, in the comparative example in which the state of the game interruption command is controlled by referring to the MY counter Cmy, there is an advantage that the advance notification flag Fj can be omitted. However, in the above comparison example, when the MY counter Cmy decreases below the numerical value "18500", the game interruption command becomes OFF. That is, there may be an inconvenience that the game interruption command is turned off in the advance notification state. According to this embodiment, even if the MY counter Cmy decreases below the numerical value "18500", the advance notification flag Fj is maintained in the ON state, and the game interruption command is maintained in the ON state. Therefore, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 25, it is assumed that the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" at time t2 in the AT state, and the advance notification state shifts to the complete state. As shown in FIG. 25, when transitioning to the complete state, the AT signal is changed to the OFF state. However, even in the case of transitioning to the complete state, the ball release state flag is maintained in the AT state.

Assume a configuration in which, during the period in which the AT signal is in the ON state, a stand lamp provided for each gaming machine 1 blinks to notify that it is in the AT state. Furthermore, in the above configuration, a configuration is assumed in which the AT signal is maintained in the ON state when the AT state transitions to the complete state. With the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that in the complete state in which no game is possible, the platform lamp notifies the user that the AT state is present. In this embodiment, since the AT signal is changed to the OFF state when transitioning to the complete state, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 25, upon transition to the complete state, the security signal changes from the OFF state to the ON state for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds). According to the above configuration, it becomes possible for the management device to notify that the state has transitioned to the complete state. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game interruption command is maintained in the ON state for a period after transitioning from the advance notification state to the complete state. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which, upon transition to the complete state, the advance notification flag Fj is changed to the OFF state, and the game interruption command is set to the OFF state.

<Each process executed by the main CPU>
FIG. 26(a) is a flowchart of the startup process of the main CPU 301. The main CPU 301 executes startup processing when a reset signal from the reset circuit is input. The reset signal is output when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when power supply voltage is started to be supplied to the main control board 300 by turning on the power switch 511SW, a startup process is executed.

When starting the startup process, the main CPU 301 executes a startup initialization process (S11). By the startup initialization process, the main CPU 301 initializes each register of the main control board 300. Note that the main CPU 301 may execute a security check process to determine the validity of the control program stored in the main ROM 302 before the startup initialization process.

After executing the startup initialization process, the main CPU 301 executes a RAM check process (S12). In the RAM check process, abnormalities in each piece of information stored in the main RAM 303 are detected. Specifically, when the power is cut off, the main CPU 301 calculates and backs up the checksum of a specific storage area in the main RAM 303. The main CPU 301 also calculates a checksum in the RAM check process when the power is turned on. The main CPU 301 compares the checksum backed up when the power was cut off and the checksum calculated when the power was turned on in the RAM check process. If the checksums do not match, the main CPU 301 determines that an abnormality has occurred in each information in the main RAM 303.

After executing the RAM check process, the main CPU 301 refers to the result of the RAM check process and determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 303 (S13). If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 303 (S13: Yes), the main CPU 301 changes the abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) to the ON state (S14), and advances the process to step S15. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no abnormality in the main RAM 303 (S13: No), the main CPU 301 skips step S14 and advances the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 301 determines whether a setting key is being operated. If the setting key is being operated (S15: Yes), the main CPU 301 shifts to setting change processing. On the other hand, if the setting key is not operated (S15: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether the clear button 512 is operated (S16). If it is determined that the clear button 512 has been operated (S16: Yes), the main CPU 301 executes the clear process (S17) and then proceeds to the recovery process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the clear button 512 has not been operated (S16: No), the main CPU 301 skips the clear process (S17) and proceeds to the recovery process.

The main RAM 303 is provided with an RWM (read/write memory) area including a work area and a stack area. In this embodiment, the RWM area is Each information is initialized. However, the storage area to be initialized changes depending on the type of initialization processing. Specifically, the address range in the RWM area is specified depending on the type of initialization process. In the initialization process, each piece of information in the specified address range among the pieces of information in the RWM area is initialized. For example, in the clearing process, each piece of information in the RWM area including the gaming status flag and the ball output status flag is initialized.

FIG. 26(b) is a flowchart of the setting change processing of the main CPU 301. When the main CPU 301 starts the setting change process, it executes the setting change mode process (S21). In the setting change mode process, the setting values (1 to 6) referenced in each game can be changed. Specifically, when the power is turned off, the current setting values are backed up. When the main CPU 301 starts processing during the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the main CPU 301 causes the setting display section 36 to display a number corresponding to the backed up setting value. Further, in the setting change mode process, the main CPU 301 changes the number on the setting display section 36 every time the setting change button 37 is operated. In the setting change mode processing, when the start lever 24 is operated, the setting value corresponding to the number displayed on the setting display section 36 is determined. After determining the setting value, the main CPU 301 ends the setting change mode processing.

After executing the setting change mode process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) is in the ON state (S22). When determining that the abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) is in the ON state (S22: Yes), the main CPU 301 executes a full initialization process (S23). In the above-described all-initialization process, all areas of the RWM area are initialized. Specifically, all information including performance information for displaying each game information on the main display 40 is initialized in the entire initialization process. Furthermore, in the full initialization process, the complete flag Fc is initialized (changed to the OFF state). Furthermore, in the full initialization process, an abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) is initialized. The above abnormality detection flag Fer is initialized only in the entire initialization process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) is not in the ON state (S22: No), the main CPU 301 executes initialization processing when changing settings (S24). In the above setting change initialization process, like the clear process described above, each piece of information including the gaming status flag and the ball output status flag among the pieces of information in the RWM area is initialized. However, in the setting change initialization process, the complete flag Fc is initialized in addition to the above information, but in the clear process, the complete flag Fc is not initialized. The complete flag Fc is initialized only in the setting change initialization process and the total initialization process. After executing the initialization process (S23, S24), the main CPU 301 shifts to the recovery process.

FIG. 26(c) is a flowchart of the recovery processing of the main CPU 301. When starting the recovery process, the main CPU 301 executes a recovery initialization process (S31). In the above recovery initialization processing, each piece of information including the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj is initialized. After executing the recovery initialization process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the abnormality detection flag Fer (RAM abnormality) is in the ON state (S32). When determining that the abnormality detection flag Fer is in the ON state (S32: Yes), the main CPU 301 shifts to the abnormality stop state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality detection flag Fer is not in the ON state (S32: No), the main CPU 301 restores each register that was backed up when the power was cut off (S33), and shifts to the game control process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the game control process of the main CPU 301. The game control process is executed each time a player plays one game. Although described in detail later, the main CPU 301 executes interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1.49 ms) during the period in which the game control processing is executed. That is, the main CPU 301 alternately executes the game control process and the interrupt process. For example, the command sent to the sub-control board 400 is set in the game control process, and is sent to the sub-control board 400 in the interrupt process. Commands indicating various lottery results executed by the main CPU 301 or numerical values of various counters provided in the main RAM 303 are transmitted to the sub control board 400 as appropriate. Further, each timer (for example, a wait timer) set in the game control process is subtracted in the interrupt process.

When the main CPU 301 starts the game control process, it executes the initial setting process (S101). The initial setting process is executed every time one game is completed. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 initializes a storage area of the RWM area of the main RAM 303 that is initialized for each game. For example, the winning area storage area in which the winning area (winning area number) of the previous game is stored is initialized in the initial setting process.

After the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 executes an automatic input process (S102). Through the automatic insertion process, when the symbol combinations related to the replay are aligned on the active line as a result of the previous game, the main CPU 301 sets the same number of bet medals as the previous game as the bet medals for the current game. Specifically, in the automatic input process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the replay flag is in the ON state. When the replay flag is in the ON state, the main CPU 301 automatically inserts bet medals.

The main CPU 301 executes the first abnormality determination process (S103) after the automatic input process. In the first abnormality determination process, it is determined whether various abnormalities have been detected. Specifically, when an abnormality occurs, an abnormality detection flag corresponding to the abnormality is changed to an ON state in an interrupt process (an abnormality detection process to be described later).

In the first abnormality determination process, it is determined whether each abnormality detection flag corresponding to each abnormality is in the ON state. Furthermore, if an abnormality that transitions to the abnormality stop state is detected among the abnormalities, the system transitions to the abnormality stop state in the first abnormality determination process. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the abnormalities that transition to the abnormality stop state may be collectively referred to as "Type 1 abnormalities." Similarly, the abnormality detection flag (for example, Fes) that is turned ON when a type 1 abnormality (for example, sensor abnormality) is detected may be collectively referred to as "abnormality detection flag Fe1."

As will be described in detail later, in the first abnormality determination process, it is determined whether the complete flag Fc is in the ON state. When the complete flag Fc is in the ON state, a transition is made to the complete state in the first abnormality determination process.

After the first abnormality determination process, the main CPU 301 executes a game start pre-process (S104). In the game start pre-processing, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not medals have been inserted from the medal insertion section 8 and whether or not the payment button 23 has been operated. If it is determined that medals have been inserted, the main CPU 301 adds bet medals or credits. Further, if it is determined that the settlement button 23 has been operated, the main CPU 301 refunds the bet medals or credits. Further, in the game start pre-processing, it is determined whether the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated. When determining that the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated, the main CPU 301 sets a specified number of bet medals using credits.

After executing the game start pre-processing, the main CPU 301 determines whether the game start conditions are satisfied (S105). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the start lever 24 has been operated with a specified number of bet medals set. If it is determined that the start condition is not satisfied (S105: No), the main CPU 301 returns the process to the first abnormality determination process (S103). In the above configuration, the game start pre-processing and the first abnormality determination process are repeatedly executed during the non-gaming period until the game start condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to insert medals during the non-gaming period. Furthermore, if a type 1 abnormality is detected during the non-gaming period, the game immediately shifts to the abnormality stop state.

When the main CPU 301 determines that the game start condition is satisfied (S105: Yes), it executes the start process. In the start process, a setting value confirmation process, a process to obtain a random number value R (1 to 3), an internal lottery process to determine a winning area based on a random number value R1, and a round performance decision to determine a round performance based on a random number value R2. process, a lottery process related to the instruction function using the random number value R3, and an instruction number determination process for determining the instruction number.

In the setting value confirmation process of the start time process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting value is appropriate. Specifically, in the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting value is within the range of the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "6". If the main CPU 301 determines that the set value is not within the range of the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "6", the main CPU 301 stores a set value abnormality command indicating an abnormality in the set value in the command storage area, and stores the abnormality corresponding to the set value abnormality. Change the detection flag (Fe1) to ON state.

After executing the start time process, the main CPU 301 executes the spinning drum effect process (S107). For example, in the spinning performance process, a process of accepting various game operations and switching the mode of the reels 12 (acceleration, variable display, stop, standstill, vibration) is executed. In addition, the main CPU 301 sets the above-mentioned delay time by lottery in the spinning performance process. Note that the remaining time of the wait period is also subtracted in the spinning performance process.

The main CPU 301 executes the wait process (S108) after executing the spinning drum effect process. The wait process is a process for making the time length of each game longer than a predetermined length. In the wait process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait period has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait period has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 does not proceed from the wait process to the pre-stop process described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the wait period has elapsed, the main CPU 301 moves to pre-stop processing (S109). In the pre-stop process, various data (such as data used to control the stop of each reel 12) is stored in the main RAM 303 according to the winning area determined in the internal lottery process. In the stop control process to be described later, each reel 12 is stopped according to each data stored in the pre-stop process, so that symbol combinations related to the winning combination specified in the winning area are stopped and displayed on the active line.

After the main CPU 301 executes the pre-stop processing, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the stop control process (S110). Through the stop control process, the main CPU 301 stops the reel 12 corresponding to each stop button 25 each time the stop button 25 is operated. Each reel 12 stops at a symbol position according to each data set in the above-mentioned pre-stop processing.

When all the reels 12 are stopped in the stop control process, the main CPU 301 shifts to display determination process (S111). In the display determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. In the display determination process described above, the main CPU 301 stores the symbol combinations (including losers) of winning combinations that are stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination stopped and displayed on the active line is stored as the scheduled number of medals to be paid out. Further, a display winning combination command that specifies the symbol combination of the winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line is stored in the command storage area. The above display winning combination command is immediately transmitted to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412) by interrupt processing. According to the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can execute the performance corresponding to the display winning combination command immediately after each reel 12 stops (immediately after the display determination process).

After executing the display determination process, the main CPU 301 executes the second abnormality determination process (S112). In the second abnormality determination process, it is determined whether or not various abnormality detection flags are in the ON state, similarly to the above-described first abnormality determination process during the non-gaming period. However, while the above-described first abnormality determination process determines the presence or absence of an abnormality during the non-gaming period, the second abnormality determination process determines the presence or absence of an abnormality during the period in which each reel 12 fluctuates.

If no abnormality is detected during the period in which the reels 12 fluctuate, the process moves from the second abnormality determination process to the payout process (S113). In the payout process, medals are given in the expected payout number stored in the display determination process described above. Specifically, if the credits have not reached the upper limit, the scheduled payout number is added to the credits. On the other hand, if the credits have reached the upper limit, the hopper 520 performs a payout operation and pays out the scheduled number of medals. Furthermore, when the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in the current game, the main CPU 301 changes the replay operation flag to the ON state in the payout process.

If a type 1 abnormality is detected during the period in which the reel 12 fluctuates (abnormality detection flag F1=ON), a transition is made to the abnormality stop state in the second abnormality determination process. In the above case, the payout process will not be executed until the abnormality stop state is canceled. Therefore, even if the expected number of coins to be paid out is set to a value of "1" or more, the payout process will not be executed until the abnormal stop state is released.

After executing the payout process, the main CPU 301 executes a performance information calculation process (S114). In the performance information calculation process, each of the above-mentioned performance information is updated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 updates each performance information in the performance information calculation process according to the number of medals paid out in the current game.

After executing the performance information calculation process, the main CPU 301 executes a completeness determination process (S115). As will be described in detail later, in the complete determination process, the MY counter Cmy is updated according to the number of medals paid out in the immediately previous payout process. In the complete determination process, it is determined whether the MY counter Cmy has reached the threshold value "19000". In the complete process, when it is determined that the MY counter Cmy has reached the threshold value, the complete flag Fc is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. When the complete flag Fc is changed to the ON state in the complete determination process, the process shifts to the complete state in the subsequent first abnormality determination process (S103).

After executing the completion determination process, the main CPU 301 executes a stop process (S116). In the stop processing, the main CPU 301 shifts the ball output state and the game state. The above stoppage processing includes processing related to the above-mentioned instruction function. For example, in the stop processing, the main CPU 301 starts or ends an advantageous section as the ball output state changes. Further, when the RBB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the current game, the main CPU 301 shifts the gaming state from the internal medium state to the bonus activation state in the stop processing. When the main CPU 301 completes the stop processing, the main CPU 301 returns the processing to step S101.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the completion determination process of the main CPU 301. When starting the complete determination process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the complete flag Fc is in the ON state (S121). When it is determined that the complete flag Fc is not in the ON state (S121: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not replay has been activated in the current game (S122). If it is determined that the replay has been activated in the current game (S122: Yes), the main CPU 301 omits the subsequent steps S and ends the completion determination process.

If it is determined that the replay has not been activated in the current game (S122: No), the main CPU 301 subtracts the number of bet medals nk for the current game from the current value of the MY counter Cmy, and It is determined whether the result of adding the number nh of medals to be paid out is less than the numerical value "0" (is a negative number) (S123). If the above calculation result (=Cmy−nk+nh) is less than the numerical value “0” (S123: Yes), the main CPU 301 sets the current value of the MY counter Cmy to the numerical value “0” and proceeds to step S125.

On the other hand, if the calculation result is the numerical value "0" or more (S123: No), the main CPU 301 changes the current value of the MY counter Cmy to the calculation result (S124), and moves to step S125. Further, in each game, a command indicating the updated MY counter Cmy is transmitted to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412). Upon receiving the above command, the sub CPU 412 updates the number of remaining medals displayed in the advance notification image Gj according to the command.

In step S125, the main CPU 301 determines whether the updated MY counter Cmy has reached the threshold value "19000" (S125). When determining that the MY counter Cmy has reached the threshold value "19000" (S125: Yes), the main CPU 301 changes the complete flag Fc to the ON state (S126), and ends the complete determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the MY counter Cmy has not reached the threshold value "19000" (S125: No), the main CPU 301 skips step S126 and ends the completion determination process.

Note that, in principle, when the complete flag Fc is changed to the ON state, the state shifts to the complete state immediately after that. However, when the complete flag Fc is changed to the ON state in the bonus operating state, the game shifts to a standby state (playable state) until the bonus operating state ends. A case in which the determination in step S121 described above is "Yes" is assumed to be a case in which a game is executed in a standby state. When determining that the complete flag Fc is in the ON state (S121: Yes), the main CPU 301 skips subsequent steps S122 to S126 and ends the complete determination process. Each omitted step S includes step S124 of updating the MY counter Cmy. As understood from the above explanation, in each game in the standby state, updating of the MY counter Cmy is stopped.

FIG. 29(a) is a flowchart of the first abnormality determination process of the main CPU 301. As described above, the first abnormality determination process is repeatedly executed during the non-gaming period. When the first abnormality determination process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether the current gaming state is a bonus operating state (S131). If it is determined that the bonus is activated (S131: Yes), the main CPU 301 moves to step S136.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301 determines that it is not in the bonus operating state (in the non-internal state or in the internal state) (S131: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether the complete flag Fc is in the ON state (S132). When determining that the complete flag Fc is not in the ON state (S132: No), the main CPU 301 moves to step S136. In addition, cases where it is determined that the bonus is not activated and the complete flag Fc is ON are when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" in a state other than the bonus activated state, or when the bonus is activated in the standby state. It is assumed that the operating state has ended.

If it is determined that the bonus is not in the operating state and the complete flag Fc is in the ON state, the main CPU 301 enables completion notification to be started (S133). Specifically, the main CPU 301 makes it possible to transmit a complete command indicating transition to the complete state to the sub CPU 412. Upon receiving the above complete command, the sub CPU 412 displays a complete image Gc and outputs a complete sound, for example.

It is assumed that the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on and the complete flag Fc is in the ON state. In the above case, it is assumed that the power is turned OFF/ON in the complete state. In the above case, when the game control process is started after the recovery process is executed, the first abnormality determination process immediately shifts to the complete state.

Further, if the complete flag Fc is in the ON state when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned complete command is transmitted in the same way as when the complete flag Fc is changed to the ON state during the game. When the sub CPU 412 receives a complete command immediately after power is turned on, it executes the same process as when receiving a complete command during a game. In the above configuration, when the complete flag Fc is in the ON state when the power is turned on, the complete image Gc is displayed and the complete sound is output immediately after the game control process is started (immediately after the recovery process is executed).

After enabling completion notification to start, the main CPU 301 executes automatic payment processing (S134). The automatic settlement process causes the hopper 520 to perform a payout operation, and all medals stored in the credit card are paid out to the player. After executing the automatic payment process, the main CPU 301 executes external signal processing (S135). In the external signal processing, the security signal among the external signals is changed to an ON state. Further, if the AT signal is in the ON state at the time when the external signal processing is executed, the AT signal is changed to the OFF state. After executing the external signal processing, the main CPU 301 shifts to the complete state.

When the bonus is in operation (S131: Yes) or when the complete flag Fc is not in the ON state (S132: No), the main CPU 301 sets the abnormality detection flag Fe1 (for example, the abnormality detection flag Fes indicating the presence or absence of a sensor abnormality). ) is in the ON state (S136). When the main CPU 301 determines that the abnormality detection flag Fe1 is in the ON state (S136: Yes), the main CPU 301 shifts to the abnormality stop state. Note that when transitioning to the abnormality stop state, a command indicating the type of detected abnormality is stored in the command storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality detection flag Fe1 is not in the ON state (S136: No), the main CPU 301 ends the first abnormality determination process and returns to the game control process.

FIG. 29(b) is a flowchart of the second abnormality determination process of the main CPU 301. As described above, the second abnormality determination process is executed when all the reels 12 stop. In the second abnormality determination process, similarly to the first abnormality determination process described above, it is determined whether the abnormality detection flag Fe1 is in the ON state (S141). When determining that the abnormality detection flag Fe1 is in the ON state (S141: Yes), the main CPU 301 shifts to the abnormality stop state.

In the above configuration, if a type 1 abnormality occurs during a period in which the reels 12 fluctuate, the reel 12 shifts to the abnormality stop state when all the reels 12 stop. Note that when transitioning to the abnormality stop state, a command indicating the type of detected abnormality is stored in the command storage area. When determining that the abnormality detection flag Fe1 is not in the ON state (S141: No), the main CPU 301 returns to the game control process.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart of interrupt processing. The main CPU 301 executes an interrupt process every 1.49 ms during a period in which the game control process is executed.

When the main CPU 301 starts interrupt processing, it saves data in various registers (S201). After that, the main CPU 301 executes input port reading processing (S202). In the input port reading process, the main CPU 301 reads various signals input to the I/F circuit 305. Specifically, in the input port reading process, the main CPU 301 reads ON signals of the start switch 24SW, each stop switch 25SW, medal sensor 34SE, payment switch 23SW, and the like. The main CPU 301 sets the detection flags of the sensors and switches that have read the ON signal to the ON state.

After executing the input port reading process, the main CPU 301 executes a timer measurement process (S203). In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts predetermined values from various timers. In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts the rotation performance timer and the wait timer set in the wait process.

After executing the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 selects a reel to be driven from among the rotating reels 12 (S204), and executes a drive control process for the reel to be driven (S205). In the drive control process, the main CPU 301 outputs a drive pulse to the stepping motor of the reel to be driven. When a drive pulse is input, the excitation pattern of the stepping motor is switched.

The main CPU 301 determines whether the drive control process for all reels 12 has been executed (S206). If it is determined that the drive control process for all reels 12 has not been executed (S206: NO), the main CPU 301 repeats step S204 and step S205. On the other hand, if it is determined that the drive control process for all reels 12 has been executed (S206: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to external signal output process (S207).

The main CPU 301 outputs a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine 1 in an external signal output process. For example, when starting the setting change process, the main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating the start of the setting change process to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Further, the main CPU 301 changes the security signal to the ON state when the advance notification flag Fj is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. Thereafter, when approximately 30 seconds have elapsed since the advance notification flag Fj was changed to the ON state, the main CPU 301 changes the security signal to the OFF state. Similarly, the main CPU 301 changes the security signal to the ON state when the complete flag Fc is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, and then changes the security signal to the OFF state after about 30 seconds have passed. . Even when the system shifts to the abnormal stop state, the security signal is changed to the ON state for about 30 seconds.

The main CPU 301 drives various lamps in the LED display process (S208). For example, the main CPU 301 displays the BET lamp 14 in a manner indicated by the BET lamp display data generated in the game control process. Further, in the LED display process, the main CPU 301 lights up the replay display lamp 18 when the replay flag is set to the ON state. In addition, the main CPU 301 displays the number of credits on the stored number display 17 in the LED display process. Furthermore, in the LED display process, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information corresponding to the instruction number determined in the instruction number determination process.

After executing the LED display process, the main CPU 301 executes an abnormality detection process. In the abnormality detection process, various abnormalities are detected, and the abnormality detection flag corresponding to the abnormality is changed to an ON state. For example, the main CPU 301 determines whether the medal sensor 34SE is in the ON state in the abnormality detection process. In addition, if the medal sensor 34SE is maintained in the ON state 400 times in a row (for about 0.6 seconds) during the abnormality detection process (interrupt process), the main CPU 301 turns the abnormality detection flag Fes (sensor abnormality) ON. Change to state.

When the abnormality detection flag Fes (first type abnormality) is changed to ON state in the abnormality detection process, the subsequent first abnormality determination process (during the non-gaming period) or second abnormality determination process (when all reels 12 are stopped) At this point, the system transitions to an abnormality stop state. Further, for example, in the abnormality detection process, it is determined whether the front door switch 3SW is in the ON state, and if it is in the ON state, the abnormality detection flag Fed is changed to the ON state.

After the abnormality detection process, the main CPU 301 moves to command transmission process (S210). As described above, various commands are stored in the command storage area of the main RAM 303. The command stored in the command storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 in a command transmission process.

After the command transmission process, the main CPU 301 executes a register restoration process (S211), and restores the data saved in step S210 to the register. When the register return process is executed, the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S of the game control process that was being executed when the interrupt process was started.

FIG. 31(a) is a memory map in the main control board 300. In this embodiment, various types of information are stored in the main ROM 302, main RAM 303, and internal registers of the main CPU 301 provided in the main control board 300. FIG. 31(a) shows the types of storage areas of the main control board 300. The types of storage areas include a ROM area that stores information in a nonvolatile manner, an RWM area that stores information in an erasable and rewritable manner, and a register (a register for setting internal functions of the main CPU 301).

The storage area of the main control board 300 described above is provided with a usage area R1 and an outside usage area R2. The usage area R1 stores information other than information necessary to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes (hereinafter referred to as "security information"). Specifically, the usage area R1 mainly stores game control information for controlling the progress of the game. On the other hand, in the outside use area R2, game control information is not stored in principle, but various information including security information is stored.

The above security information includes, for example, each piece of information (program, data) for enabling the function of transitioning to the complete state. Furthermore, the security information includes information (performance information, etc.) that enables the function of displaying each game information on the main display 40. Furthermore, the security information includes information (pre-notification flag Fj, etc.) for realizing the function of transmitting various commands (including the above-mentioned game interruption command) to the test device.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the usage area R1 includes a data area R11, a control area R12, and an RWM area R13. The data area R11 stores data for controlling the progress of the game. For example, a winning area determination table is stored in the data area R11. A program for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the control area R12. For example, a game control processing program is stored in the control area R12. The RWM area R13 stores each piece of information that is updated as the program in the control area R12 is executed. For example, the RWM area R13 stores, for example, the number of credit medals, the number of bets, a re-game flag, a payout state flag, a game state flag, a scheduled payout number, a setting value, and a difference number counter.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the outside use area R2 includes a data area R21, a control area R22, and an RWM area R23. Data area R21 stores data necessary to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes. For example, the threshold value "19000" of the MY counter Cmy to transition to the complete state is stored in the data area R21. The control area R22 stores programs necessary to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes. For example, the control area R22 stores a program for completion determination processing. The RWM area R23 stores each piece of information that is updated as the program in the control area R22 is executed. For example, the MY counter Cmy is stored in the RWM area R23.

FIG. 31(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the usage area R1 and the outside usage area R2. As described above, when the program in the control area R12 in the usage area R1 is executed, the data in the data area R11 is referenced, and each piece of information in the RWM area R13 is referenced and updated. When the program in the control area R22 outside the used area R2 is executed, the data in the data area R21 is referenced, and each piece of information in the RWM area R23 is referenced and updated.

However, the program in the control area R12 in the used area R1 does not refer to the data area R21 outside the used area R2. Furthermore, the program in the control area R12 in the used area R1 refers to the RWM area R23 outside the used area R2, but does not update it. Similarly, the program in the control area R22 outside the used area R2 does not refer to the data area R11 in the used area R1. Furthermore, the program in the control area R22 outside the used area R2 refers to the RWM area R13 in the used area R1, but does not update it.

In this embodiment, programs for each process (internal lottery process, process related to the instruction function) that affects the ball payout rate are stored in the use area R1. However, among the programs in the usage area R1 (control area R12), the MY counter Cmy and advance notification flag Fj stored in the outside usage area R2 (RWM area 23) are referenced in the programs for each process that affects the ball output rate. It was configured so that it would not be possible. Assume a configuration in which the MY counter Cmy or the advance notification flag Fj is referred to in the process related to the instruction function. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the AT state is likely to end immediately before the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" can be considered. However, with the above configuration, there may be an inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired. According to this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

The program in the control area R22 outside the usage area R2 is modularized for each function. Further, the program in the control area R22 outside the usage area R2 is called and executed from the program in the control area R12 in the usage area R1 using a predetermined method. Specifically, the program in the control area R22 is called by the program in the calling process in the control area R12. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the process executed by the program in the usage area R1 may be simply referred to as "the process in the usage area R1." Furthermore, the process executed by the program outside the used area R2 may be simply referred to as "processing outside the used area R2."

FIG. 31(c-1) and FIG. 31(c-2) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of internal registers. The main CPU 301 of this embodiment is a Z80 CPU and includes various internal registers. The internal register of the main CPU 301 is a storage area smaller than the RWM area of the main RAM 303. The internal registers described above can be updated and referenced by both processing in the used area R1 and processing outside the used area R2, since there is little room for storing invalid programs. Internal registers include general-purpose registers and special-purpose registers.

FIG. 31(c-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a general-purpose register among internal registers. General-purpose registers are registers whose uses are not fixed, and include W registers, A registers, B registers, C registers, D registers, E registers, IX registers, and IY registers. The W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, and E register are 8-bit registers, and the IX register and IY register are 16-bit registers. Each of the above general-purpose registers is used as, for example, an accumulator, an interrupt register, a refresh register, or an index register.

FIG. 31(c-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a dedicated register among internal registers. Dedicated registers are registers whose uses are fixed, and include PC registers, SP registers, TP registers, and PSW registers. The PC register is used as a program counter. Additionally, the SP register is used as a stack pointer. The TP register is used as a table pointer. The PSW register is used as a program status word. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the SP register may be referred to as "stack pointer SP". Further, the PSW register may be referred to as a "flag register PSW".

Immediately after the above call process is executed, all internal registers used by the program in the used area R1 are saved. Specifically, when the processing of R2 outside the used area is started, immediately after that, the current value of the internal register (the numerical value used in the used area R1) is saved in the RWM area R23 of R2 outside the used area. . Thereafter, when the processing for the outside area R2 is completed and the process moves to the area for use R1, the numerical value of the internal register saved in the RWM area R23 is restored.

FIG. 32A is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the process for outside the use area R2 is called by the process for calling the use area R1. The above FIG. 32(a) explains the details of the above-mentioned game control process, and a part of step S of the game control process is extracted and shown. Specifically, each step S of the above-mentioned payout process (S112), performance calculation process (S113), complete determination process (S114), and first abnormality determination process (S102) is shown (S112 → S113 → S114 →... →S102).

As shown in FIG. 32(a), among the above-mentioned steps of the game control process, the payout process (S112) and the first abnormality determination process (S102) are processes for the use area R1. On the other hand, among the above-mentioned steps of the game control process, the performance calculation process (S113) and the complete determination process (S114) are processes outside the use area R2. The above performance calculation process (S113) and completion determination process (S114) are called and executed by the use area R1 call process Sc (Sc1, Sc2). Note that the calling process program is stored in the usage area R1 (control area 12) for each process outside the usage area R2 that is the target of the call.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the main CPU 301 executes a calling process (Sc1) for calling the performance calculation process 113 after executing the payout process. When the calling process is started, the main CPU 301 saves the current value of the flag register PSW (St1). Specifically, the calling process is a process for the used area R1, and the current value of the flag register PSW is saved in the stack area of the RWM area R13. This saved flag register PSW also includes interrupt permission information. Here, the interrupt permission information is information indicating whether the current state is a state in which interrupts are permitted or a state in which interrupts are prohibited. After saving the current value of the flag register PSW, the main CPU 301 prohibits execution of interrupt processing (St2). Next, the main CPU 301 calls a performance calculation process for R2 outside the usage area (St3). That is, in this embodiment, after the payout process is executed, the process for R2 outside the use area is executed.

When starting the performance calculation process (S113), the main CPU 301 saves the current value of the stack pointer SP (the numerical value used in the used area R1) to the work area of the RWM area R23 (Sw1). Thereafter, the initial value outside the used area R2 is set to the stack pointer SP (Sw2). Further, after setting the initial value to the stack pointer SP, the current values of other internal registers (the numerical values used in the used area R1) are saved to the stack area of the RWM area R23 (Sw3).

The main CPU 301 saves the current value of the internal register to the stack area of the RWM area R23, and then calculates the performance information (Sw4). In step Sw4 above, the performance information targeted for calculation among each performance information is updated (calculated). Specifically, six types of performance information are stored in the work area of the RWM area R23, including the role combination ratio, the role object ratio, the instruction-inclusive role object ratio, the most recent successive role ratio, the most recent role object ratio, and the bonus game ratio. . In the performance calculation process, any one of each piece of performance information is set as a calculation target, and the calculation target is updated.

When the main CPU 301 ends the processing of R2 outside the used area (including performance calculation processing), the main CPU 301 restores the numerical value of the internal register and the numerical value of the stack pointer SP that was saved when starting the processing of R2 outside the used area. . For example, when the main CPU 301 updates the performance information that is the target of calculation in the performance calculation process, the main CPU 301 restores the numerical value of the internal register that was saved to the stack area of the RWM area R23 before starting the performance calculation process to the internal register (Sw5). . Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the work area of the RWM area R23 (the value used in the used area R1) is returned to the stack pointer SP (Sw6). After restoring the values in the internal register and the stack pointer SP, the main CPU 301 returns the processing to the used area R1.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the process outside the used area R2 is completed and the process returns to the used area R1, the process moves to step St4 of the calling process. In the above step St4, the flag register PSW is set (restored) according to the numerical value saved in the stack area of the RWM area R13 of the used area R1 in the above step St1. By restoring the flag register PSW, the interrupt permission information is also restored, and the state is returned to either the interrupt permission state or the interrupt prohibition state at step St1. Here, in many cases when a process outside the used area is called, the interrupt is enabled, and therefore the interrupt enabled state is often returned to.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the performance calculation process is called, the main CPU 301 changes the performance information to be calculated (St5). Specifically, any of the performance information that has not been updated in the current game is set as a calculation target. After changing the calculation target, the main CPU 301 determines whether all performance information has been calculated (updated) (St6). If performance information that has not been updated remains (St6: No), the main CPU 301 returns the process to the calling process (Sc1). When the above calling process is executed, the performance calculation process is called again, and the performance information to be calculated is updated.

In the above configuration, the calling process (Sc1) and the performance calculation process (S113) are repeatedly executed until it is determined that all the performance information has been updated (St6: Yes). If it is determined that all the performance information has been updated, the main CPU 301 executes a calling process (Sc2) for calling a complete determination process for R2 outside the usage area. The calling process in step Sc2 includes steps St1 to St4, similar to step Sc1 described above. However, in step St3 (call) of step Sc1, the performance calculation process is called, but in step Sc2, the complete determination process (S114) is called.

When the completion determination process S115 is started, similarly to the performance calculation process, the current value of the stack pointer SP is saved to the work area of the RWM area R23, the initial value outside the used area R2 is set to the stack pointer SP, and the internal The current value of the register is saved to the stack area of the RWM area R23. After that, the main CPU 301 refers to the complete flag Fc stored in the work area of the RWM area R23 outside the used area R2, and determines whether the complete flag Fc is in the ON state (S121). In addition, in the completion determination process, the main CPU 301 updates the MY counter Cmy stored in the work area of the RWM area R23. Specifically, the scheduled payout number and bet number for the current game are stored in the usage area R1 (RWM area R13). In the complete determination process, the main CPU 301 updates the MY counter Cmy by referring to the expected payout number and the bet number in the usage area R1 (S123, S124).

Furthermore, in the complete determination process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the MY counter Cmy has reached the threshold value "19000". When determining that the MY counter Cmy has reached the threshold value "19000", the main CPU 301 changes the complete flag Fc of the out-of-use area R2 (RWM area R23) from the OFF state to the ON state. Thereafter, the main CPU 111 restores the numerical value of the internal register saved in the RWM area R23 at the start of the completion determination process, and returns the process to the used area R1.

FIG. 32(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the program XXXX stored in the usage area R1 (control area R12). The above program XXXX is a program for the above-mentioned call processing. As understood from FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b-1), the instruction "PUSH" is executed in step St1, the instruction "DI" is executed in step St2, and the instruction "CALL" is executed in step St3. is executed, and in step St4, the instruction "POP" is executed.

FIG. 32(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the program YYYY stored in the usage area R2 (control area R22). The above program YYYY is a program for processing (for example, performance calculation processing) called in the above-mentioned calling processing. As described above, the process called in the call process includes steps Sw1 to Sw6. FIG. 32(b-2) shows step Sw4 of the above steps S omitted.

As understood from the above description, in this embodiment, when the payout process for the usage area R1 is executed, the calling process is executed, and the performance calculation process for the outside usage area R2 is executed. Furthermore, when the performance calculation process is executed, the process is once returned to the used area R1, and then the completion determination process for R2 outside the used area is executed again. As shown in FIG. 32(a), after the payout process is executed, each process for R2 outside the usage area is executed, and then the first abnormality determination process is executed.

In the first abnormality determination process, as described above, the process of transitioning to the complete state (No in S132 in FIG. 29(a)) may be executed. In other words, the configuration of the present embodiment described above is such that the MY counter Cmy for transitioning to the complete state is provided outside the usage area R2, while the program for transitioning to the complete state is stored in the usage area R1. In the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which both the MY counter Cmy and the program to be transitioned to the complete state are stored in a common storage area (used area R1, used area R2), the amount of information in each storage area is It has the advantage of being dispersed.

By the way, both the performance calculation process and the complete determination process are processes outside the use area R2 that are executed immediately after the payout process. Therefore, a configuration is assumed in which the completion determination process is executed after the performance calculation process is executed without going through the process of the usage area R1. That is, a configuration (hereinafter referred to as a "comparative example") in which the performance calculation process and the completion determination process are programmed as a series of (one) process for R2 outside the usage area is assumed.

However, in the above comparison example, one program outside the usage area R2 becomes large. Therefore, when a malicious program is mixed into the program, it may be difficult to detect the problem. According to the configuration of this embodiment, compared to, for example, a comparative example, one program outside the usage area R2 can be made smaller, so there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, each area of the RWM area is initialized by the initialization process (recovery initialization process, setting change initialization process, and all initialization process). Specifically, both the predetermined area in the used area R1 (RWM area R13) and the predetermined area outside the used area R2 (RWM area R23) may be initialized by one initialization process. In the above case, when the process (program) for either the used area R1 or the outside used area R2 is executed, each predetermined area of both the used area R1 and the outside used area R2 is initialized (hereinafter referred to as " "Comparative ratio") is assumed.

However, the more opportunities there are for a program in one of the used area R1 and outside the used area R2 to access the other RWM area, the more complicated the task of evaluating (testing) the validity of the program becomes. Therefore, even for initialization, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a program in one of the used area R1 and outside the used area R2 does not access the other RWM area.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in each of the initialization processes of this embodiment, the RWM area R13 of the usage area R1 is also initialized by the process of the control area R12 of the usage area R1. Furthermore, in each of the initialization processes, the RWM area R23 outside the usage area R2 is similarly initialized by the process of the control area R22 outside the usage area R2. According to the above configuration, for example, compared to the above-mentioned comparison example, there is an advantage that the opportunity for a program in one of the used area R1 and outside the used area R2 to access the other RWM area can be suppressed. Details of the above configuration will be explained below using FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c).

FIG. 33(a) is a diagram for explaining details of the initialization process at the time of recovery. The recovery initialization process is executed when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the recovery initialization process includes a first initialization process (S34-1) and a second initialization process (S34-3). As shown in FIG. 33(a), the main CPU 301 executes the first initialization process (S34-1) in the recovery initialization process. The first initialization process described above is a process for the used area R1, and initializes a predetermined area in the RWM area R13 of the used area R1 among each storage area. Specifically, in the first initialization process of the recovery initialization process, a predetermined area including an unused area is initialized.

In the recovery initialization process, when the first initialization process is executed, the main CPU 301 executes a calling process (S34-2). In the recovery initialization process calling process, the second initialization process (S34-3) is called. The above-described second initialization process is a process for outside the used area R2, and initializes a predetermined area in the RWM area R23 outside the used area R2 of each storage area. Specifically, in the second initialization process of the recovery initialization process, a predetermined area including the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj is initialized, and the complete flag Fc is maintained. When the second initialization process is executed in the recovery initialization process, the main CPU 301 returns the process to the used area R1.

FIG. 33(b) is a diagram for explaining details of the initialization process when changing settings. The setting change initialization process is executed when the setting value is changed (including resetting). In the setting change initialization process, the main CPU 301 executes a first initialization process (S23-1). The first initialization process described above is a process for the used area R1, and initializes a predetermined area in the RWM area R13 of the used area R1 among each storage area. Specifically, in the first initialization process of the initialization process when changing settings, a predetermined area including game control information is initialized. The above game control information includes, for example, a game state flag, a ball output state flag, an advantageous section counter, and a difference number counter.

When the first initialization process is executed in the setting change initialization process, the main CPU 301 executes a calling process (S23-2). In the process of calling the initialization process when changing settings, the second initialization process (S23-3) is called. The above-described second initialization process is a process for outside the used area R2, and initializes a predetermined area in the RWM area R23 outside the used area R2 of each storage area. Specifically, in the second initialization process of the setting change initialization process, a predetermined area including the complete flag Fc is initialized. When the second initialization process is executed in the setting change initialization process, the main CPU 301 returns the process to the usage area R1.

FIG. 33(c) is a diagram for explaining details of the entire initialization process. The entire initialization process is executed when a RAM abnormality is detected. In the entire initialization process, the main CPU 301 executes a first initialization process (S24-1). The first initialization process described above is a process for the used area R1, and initializes all areas in the RWM area R13 of the used area R1 among each storage area.

In the entire initialization process, after executing the first initialization process, the main CPU 301 executes a calling process (S24-2). In the calling process of the full initialization process, the second initialization process (S24-3) is called. The above-described second initialization process is a process for R2 outside the used area, and initializes all areas in the RWM area R23 outside the used area R2 of each storage area. Specifically, in the second initialization process of the total initialization process, a predetermined area including the complete flag Fc is initialized. Furthermore, in the second initialization process of the total initialization process, performance information is initialized. After executing the second initialization process in the entire initialization process, the main CPU 301 returns the process to the usage area R1.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart of processing during a non-advantageous section. The main CPU 301 executes non-advantageous period processing in a non-advantageous period game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the non-advantageous section process in the above-mentioned start time process. It should be noted that the process during the non-advantageous period is executed in all games in the non-advantageous period, regardless of the game state.

When the non-advantageous period processing is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether the winning area of the current game is other than Replay 1 or RBB (single) (Sx0). If the winning area of the current game is Replay 1 or RBB (Sx0: No), the main CPU 301 omits the advantageous section transition process, which will be described later, and ends the non-advantageous section process. In the above case, the advantageous section does not start, and the non-advantageous section continues in the next game. On the other hand, if the winning area of the current game is other than Replay 1 or RBB (Sx0: Yes), the main CPU 301 executes advantageous section transition processing. The advantageous section transition process is a process executed when a new advantageous section is started, and includes steps Sx1 to Sx9, which will be described later.

In the advantageous section transition process, the main CPU 301 sets the initial value "0" to the differential sheet number counter (Sx1), and sets the initial value "3000" to the advantageous section counter (Sx2). Note that instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the difference number counter is initialized at the time of transition to the non-advantageous section. Alternatively, the advantageous section counter may be initialized at the time of transition to the non-advantageous section. However, even if the difference number counter and the advantageous section counter are initialized at the start of the non-advantageous section, each counter is not updated during the non-advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 34, after initializing the advantageous section counter, the main CPU 301 executes advantageous section setting value determination processing (Sx3). In the advantageous section setting value determination process, the advantageous section setting value of the newly started advantageous section is determined. After executing the advantageous section setting value determination process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming state is the internal medium state (Sx4). When the gaming state is other than the internal medium state (Sx5: No), the main CPU 301 changes the next ball payout state to the mid-cycle state (advantageous section) (Sx7).

If the next ball payout state is changed to the in-cycle state during the non-advantageous period processing (starting process) at the start of the game, the ball payout state will change from the non-advantageous section to the cycle-in-cycle state in the stop processing at the end of the game. Be changed. In the above configuration, in the non-internal intermediate state (first thing in the morning) immediately after the set value is changed, a new advantageous section can be started from the in-cycle state. However, in step Sx4 in this game, in addition to the case where the player is already in the internal medium state from the previous game, the answer is "Yes" also when the duplicate combination 1 or the duplicate combination 2 (RBB combination) is won in a non-internal medium state game. It is judged that.

After executing step Sx4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning area of the current game is the duplicate winning combination 1 (Sx5). If it is determined that the winning area of the current game is the duplicate winning combination 1 (Sx5: Yes), the main CPU 301 changes the next ball payout state to the in-cycle state (Sx7). On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning area of the current game is not the duplicate winning combination 1 (Sx5: No), the main CPU 301 changes the next ball payout state to the CZ preparation state (Sx6).

If the player is in the internal intermediate state before the game starts, the duplicate winning combination 1 will not be won in the game. Therefore, if the game is in the internal medium state before the game starts, the next ball release state is usually changed to the CZ preparation state in the non-advantageous period processing. When the ball dispensing state is changed to the CZ preparation state next time, the ball dispensing state is changed from the non-advantageous section to the CZ preparation state in the subsequent stop processing. In the above configuration, in principle, a new advantageous section is started from the CZ preparation state except in the non-internal state (first thing in the morning) immediately after the set value is changed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the non-advantageous section of the non-internal medium state, even if the duplicate combination 2 out of the duplicate combinations 1 and 2 is won, the next ball payout state will be the same as in the non-advantageous section of the internal medium state. is changed to CZ preparation state. With the above configuration, a new advantageous section can be started from the CZ preparation state even in the non-internal state immediately after the set value is changed. Therefore, for example, compared to a configuration in which the advantageous section immediately after the setting value is changed always starts from the in-cycle state (unfavorable ball output state), the player's desire to play immediately after the setting value is changed is reduced. The advantage is that it can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a part (overlapping role 2) of each overlapping role (overlapping role 1, overlapping role 2) is won, it is configured to be able to shift to the CZ preparation state, but the type of overlapping role A configuration may also be adopted in which the state is shifted to the CZ preparation state regardless of the state. However, with the above configuration, there may be an inconvenience that the state shifts to the CZ preparation state with an excessively high probability immediately after the set value is changed. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the next ball release state is changed to the CZ preparation state in the non-advantageous section process, the main CPU 301 executes the CZ preparation process (Sx8). The CZ preparation process is a process that is also executed in each game in the CZ preparation state. The CZ preparation process includes the above-described CZ level promotion process and the process of subtracting the remaining number of games in the CZ preparation state. As can be understood from the above explanation, in a game in a non-advantageous section in which transition to the CZ preparation state has been determined, the same processing as the game in the CZ preparation state is executed. When the CZ preparation process ends, the main CPU 301 ends the non-advantageous section process.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the next ball release state is changed to the in-cycle state in the non-advantageous period process, the main CPU 301 executes the above-described cycle start process (Sx9). As described above, the cycle start process includes the special CZ determination process, the battle victory determination process B, and the like. However, the process at the start of the cycle does not include various processes executed in each game in the in-cycle state. Specifically, the process at the start of the cycle does not include the cycle point determination process, the ceiling point determination process, the intermediate victory determination process, and the point high probability transfer determination process. Each of the above-mentioned processes is not executed during the non-advantageous period process, but is executed from the first game in the in-cycle state. When the cycle start process is finished, the main CPU 301 finishes the non-advantageous period process.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart of advantageous section control processing. The main CPU 301 executes advantageous section control processing in the above-mentioned stop processing. Note that the advantageous section control process is executed in all games regardless of the game state. When starting the advantageous section control process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section (Sx10). If it is determined that the vehicle is not in an advantageous section (Sx10: No), that is, in a non-advantageous section, the main CPU 301 ends the advantageous section control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in an advantageous period (Sx10: Yes), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line in the current game (Sx11).

If it is determined that the replay is not stopped and displayed (Sx11: No), the main CPU 301 executes a difference number counter update process (Sx12). In the difference number counter update process, the difference number counter is updated. Specifically, a value obtained by subtracting the number of bet medals (3 medals) from the number of medals paid out in the current game is added to the difference number counter. For example, if the number of coins to be paid out is 9, the numerical value "6" is added to the difference number counter. Further, when the number of coins to be paid out is 0, the numerical value "3" is subtracted from the difference number counter. In the replay (the next game after the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed), step Sx12 is executed with the number of automatically inserted medals as the number of bet medals in the game. After executing the difference number counter update process, the main CPU 301 advances the process to step Sx13. If it is determined that the replay is stopped and displayed in the current game (Sx11: Yes), the main CPU 301 skips the difference number counter update process and advances the process to step Sx13.

In step Sx13, the main CPU 301 determines whether the difference number counter is larger than the numerical value "2400". When determining that the difference number counter is larger than the numerical value "2400" (Sx13: Yes), the main CPU 301 initializes all parameters related to the instruction function stored in the main RAM 303 (Sx15), and ends the advantageous section control process. do. In step Sx15, for example, the above-mentioned specific counter is initialized, and the ball output state shifts to a non-advantageous section. Note that even if the ball payout state shifts to a non-advantageous section, the gaming state does not change.

If it is determined that the difference number counter is not larger than the numerical value "2400" (Sx13: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether the advantageous section counter has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (Sx14). Note that the advantageous section counter is decremented by a numerical value of "1" in the above-mentioned start processing. When determining that the advantageous section counter has a value of "0" (Sx14: Yes), the main CPU 301 executes step Sx15 described above and ends the advantageous section control process. Incidentally, a case in which "Yes" is determined in step Sx14 (when the advantageous section is forcibly ended) is assumed to be a case where the advantageous section counter is decremented to the numerical value "0" in the ending state. In this embodiment, except for the above case, the advantageous section is configured to end before the advantageous section counter is decremented to the numerical value "0". If the main CPU 301 determines that the advantageous section counter is not at the numerical value "0" (Sx14: No), the main CPU 301 skips step Sx15 and ends the advantageous section control process.

<Each process executed by the sub CPU>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub activation process of the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 executes sub start processing when a start signal from the start circuit is input. The startup circuit outputs a startup signal when the power supply voltage supplied to the sub-control board 400 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of power supply voltage to the sub control board 400 is started, the sub startup process is executed.

When the sub CPU 412 starts the sub boot process, the sub CPU 412 executes the boot initialization process (S301). In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 initializes various registers of the sub control board 400, for example.

In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether there is a backup abnormality in the sub RAM 414. If there is a backup abnormality, the sub CPU 412 initializes the backup data. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether data stored in various ROMs including the CGROM 424 is appropriate in the startup initialization process. For example, data stored at a specific address in each ROM is called and it is determined whether the data is appropriate. If an abnormality is found in various ROMs, the sub CPU 412 shifts to predetermined error processing.

In the sub-starting process, the sub CPU 412 starts the lamp control task (S302), starts the sound control task (S303), starts the image control board communication task (S304), starts the main control board communication task (S305), and performs the production. The button input task is activated (S306).

The sub CPU 412 controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5 and the performance lamp 28 by a lamp control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 controls the speakers (31, 32) by an audio control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 sends a command to the image control board 420 in the image control board communication task, receives a command from the main control board 300 in the main control board communication task, and presses the direction of the production button 26 in the production button input task. The operation of the designation button 27 is accepted.

A timer interrupt signal is input to the sub CPU 412 at predetermined time intervals. Upon receiving the timer interrupt signal, the sub CPU 412 executes one of the tasks. That is, each peripheral device including various lamps and speakers (31, 32) is controlled in a time-sharing manner.

By the way, the total number of medals acquired in a predetermined number of games is required to be within a predetermined range, no matter which setting value is set. Specifically, the total number of medals acquired in 400 games is required to be more than one third and less than 2.2 times the total number of inserted medals. Further, the total number of medals acquired in 1,600 games is required to be more than two-fifths of the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.5 times. Further, the total number of medals acquired in 6,000 games is required to be more than half of the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.26 times. Further, the total number of medals acquired in 17,500 games is required to be more than three-fifths of the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.15 times.

Whether or not the above criteria (hereinafter referred to as "ball output criteria") are met is usually confirmed through a test. If the number of medals tends to decrease excessively in a predetermined number of games, there is a high possibility that the ball output standard will not be met in the test. Furthermore, if an excessively large number of medals are likely to be obtained in a predetermined number of games, there is a high possibility that the ball output standard will not be met in the test. In other words, the higher the gambling nature of a gaming machine, the higher the possibility that it will be determined that the ball output standard is not satisfied in the test.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the gambling nature is significantly lower at a specific set value than at other set values. Specifically, we created a configuration in which when the setting value ``1'' is set among each setting value, the possibility of meeting the ball release standard in the test is significantly higher than when other setting values are set. Adopted. For example, in this embodiment, many medals can be acquired by transitioning to the instruction period (BB state). When the setting value is set to "1", the probability of transitioning to the instruction period (first hit probability) is relatively high, but the instruction period tends to end in a short period of time (difficult to repeat). According to the above configuration, when the set value "1" is set, the probability that the ball release criterion is satisfied in the test increases.

However, when the setting value is set to "1", the gambling quality is significantly lowered, and many players feel that the game lacks fun. Therefore, in a configuration in which it is not possible to determine whether or not the set value "1" is set before playing the game, some players may be inconvenienced in avoiding playing the game with the gaming machine 1. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to determine whether or not the setting value "1" is set before playing the game. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 37A is a flowchart of the power-on processing performed by the sub CPU 412. Immediately after the power is turned on, the sub CPU 412 executes a power-on process. Further, the above power-on processing is normally completed before the main CPU 301 becomes able to execute the game control processing. That is, the sub CPU 412 completes the power-on processing before the game becomes possible.

When the power-on process is started, the sub CPU 412 checks the setting values set on the main CPU 301 side. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sends a command indicating the set value to the sub CPU 412 immediately after the power is turned on. The sub CPU 412 checks the setting value indicated by the command in step Sy1. Thereafter, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the setting value confirmed in step Sy1 is "1" (Sy2).

If it is determined that the set value is not "1" (Sy2: No), the sub CPU 412 determines the normal control mode (Sy3) and ends the power-on process. On the other hand, when determining that the set value is "1" (Sy2: Yes), the sub CPU 412 determines the special control mode (Sy4) and ends the power-on process. As will be explained in detail below, the mode of the production execution means (stop button 25, speaker, liquid crystal display device 30) is different between when the normal control mode is determined and when the special control mode is determined. .

FIG. 37(b) is a diagram for explaining the aspect of the effect execution means in each control mode. As shown in FIG. 37(b), in the normal control mode, the stop button 25 emits red light during a period when the operation of the stop button 25 is invalid (for example, a period when the corresponding reel is stopped). On the other hand, in the special control mode, the stop button 25 emits green light during a period in which the operation of the stop button 25 is invalid.

In the above configuration, by checking the color of the stop button 25, the player can identify whether or not the setting value "1" has been set before playing the game. However, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the color of the stop button 25 during the period in which the stop operation is possible is blue in each control mode. Assume a configuration in which the color of the stop button 25 during the period in which the stop operation is possible is different in each control mode. With the above configuration, there is a conceivable problem that it becomes difficult for some players to intuitively judge whether or not the stop operation is valid. According to this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can adjust the master volume by operating the direction designation button 27. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(b), when the control mode is the normal control mode, the player can adjust the master volume. On the other hand, in the special control mode, the master volume cannot be changed. According to the above configuration, when the master volume cannot be changed, the player can specify that the setting value "1" is set. However, in any control mode, the error sound for notifying an error is output at the maximum volume.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can change the performance control mode (enjoy mode, normal mode, simple mode) by operating the direction designation button 27. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(b), when the control mode is the normal control mode, the player can change the production control mode. On the other hand, in the case of special control mode, the production control mode cannot be changed. According to the above configuration, when the performance control mode cannot be changed, the player can specify that the setting value "1" is set.

In this embodiment, as soon as the sub CPU 412 recovers from a power-off state, the power-on process is executed, and the stop button 25 is displayed in green. According to the above configuration, for example, when the stop button 25 is displayed in green, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 that has turned on the power can immediately understand that the setting value "1" has been set. It has the advantage of being possible.

Note that the image on the liquid crystal display device 30 during the non-gaming period may be different between the normal control mode and the special control mode. With the above configuration, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to identify whether or not the setting value "1" is set before playing the game. However, the time from when the power is turned on until it is restored is usually shorter for lamps (including the stop button lamp) than for the liquid crystal display device 30. Therefore, in this embodiment, compared to a configuration in which only the image of the liquid crystal display device 30 changes in each control mode, for example, it becomes possible to identify that the set value "1" is set after the power is turned on. This has the advantage of shortening the time required.

38(a) to (c) are flowcharts of the production control processing by the sub CPU 412. The performance control process is a process for controlling the performance in the performance execution means (liquid crystal display device 30, etc.). As shown in FIGS. 38(a) to (c), the production control process includes a sub-start process, a sub-first stop process, and a sub-stop process. FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c) show an excerpt of the production control process.

FIG. 38(a) is a flowchart of sub-start processing. When a game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating this to the sub CPU 412 (sub control board 400). When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 executes sub start processing. As shown in FIG. 38(a), when the sub start time process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the sub penalty state is in progress (Sy11). The sub CPU 412 is controlled to be in the sub penalty state during the period in which the game progress flag described above is in the OFF state (the period after the main penalty control is executed). For example, if the stop operation was performed in an irregular press order in the previous game during the non-instruction period, the sub-penalty state will occur when the sub-start processing in the current game is executed.

If it is determined that the sub-penalty state is not present (Sy11: No), the sub CPU 412 determines various performances through a performance lottery (Sy12), and ends the sub-start processing. When the performance is determined in step Sy12, the execution of the performance is started in each performance execution means. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-penalty state is in effect (Sy11: Yes), the sub CPU 412 skips the performance lottery and ends the sub start time process. According to the above configuration, in a game started during a sub-penalty state, a new performance is not determined in step Sy12.

FIG. 38(b) is a flowchart of the sub-first stop process. When the first stop operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating the stop button 25 (left, middle, right) on which the first stop operation was performed to the sub CPU 412 . When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301 during the non-instruction period, the sub CPU 412 executes the sub first stop process. As shown in FIG. 38(b), when the sub first stop process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy21). If it is determined that the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy21: Yes), the sub CPU 412 ends the sub first stop process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop operation has been performed other than the first left stop (middle first stop, right first stop) (Sy21: No), the sub CPU 412 forcibly ends the currently running production (Sy22). . For example, the performance that was started in the immediately preceding sub-start time process is forcibly ended in the sub-first stop process when a middle first stop operation or a right first stop operation is performed thereafter.

Note that when a stop operation is performed other than the first left stop, instead of a configuration in which all performances are forced to end uniformly, a configuration may be adopted in which some performances can continue to be executed. For example, when a stop operation other than the first left stop is performed, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the currently executed performance is a specific performance. If it is determined that it is a specific effect, the specific effect is continuously executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the performance is not a specific performance, the performance in progress is forcibly terminated. It should be noted that the above-mentioned specific performance is assumed to be a performance where the expectation level is high (including the case where it is confirmed) that the non-advantageous section wins. Further, as the specific performance, a performance for notifying the transition of the game state (for example, a performance when the CZ state starts) is assumed. It is preferable that the specific performance described above is started in the game even if the game scheduled to start is in a sub-penalty state.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), when the sub CPU 412 determines that a stop operation other than the first left stop has been performed, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the sub penalty state (Sy23). Further, when the sub CPU 412 determines that a stop operation other than the first left stop has been performed, the sub CPU 412 executes the notification content determination process (Sy24). In the notification content determination process, a notification image and notification sound are determined. Specifically, when the first stop operation is performed in the current game, a notification image and a notification sound that display a message "Pushing from the inside" and a notification sound "Pushing from the inside" are determined. Furthermore, when the right first stop operation is performed in the current game, a notification image and a notification sound that display the message "Pushing from the right" and a notification sound "Pushing from the right" are determined. Once the notification image is determined, the notification image is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Further, once the notification sound is determined, the notification sound is immediately output from the speaker.

FIG. 38(c) is a flowchart of the sub-stop processing. When the last stop button 25 is operated, the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating this to the sub CPU 412. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 executes the sub stop process. As shown in FIG. 38(c), when the sub-stop processing is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the left first stop operation has been performed in the current game (Sy31). If it is determined that the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy31: Yes), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the sub penalty state is in progress (S32).

If it is determined that the sub-penalty state is not in progress (Sy32: No), the sub-CPU 412 ends the sub-stop processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-penalty state is in effect (Sy32: Yes), the sub CPU 412 cancels the penalty state (Sy33) and ends the sub-stop processing. According to the above configuration, the sub-penalty state is canceled at the end of the game in which the left first stop operation is performed. Further, in step Sy31 described above, if it is determined that the left first stop operation has not been performed (Sy31: No), the sub CPU 412 omits step Sy33 and ends the sub stop processing. According to the above configuration, if no game is played on the left 1st, the sub-penalty state continues in the next and subsequent games.

<Modified example>
Each of the above forms can be modified in various ways. Specific modes of modification are illustrated below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the examples below may be combined as appropriate.

(1) In each form, in addition to the game enabled state, even in the complete state (gaming stopped state), it is possible to display a history code for recording the gaming history via the menu image. In the above configuration, the operations that can be accepted via the menu image may be different between the playable state and the complete state. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the master volume can be changed through the menu image during the playable period. In the above configuration, in the complete state, the operation of displaying the history code is possible, but the operation of changing the master volume may be impossible.

In each of the above embodiments, during the period after the transition to the complete state, the sound corresponding to the master volume set by the player is not output. Specifically, the complete sound when the complete state starts is output at the maximum volume regardless of the master volume set by the player. Furthermore, when the complete state changes to the abnormal stop state, a warning sound is output at maximum volume. According to the above-mentioned modification, there is an advantage that unnecessary operations to change the master volume by the player are suppressed.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, during the period after the transition to the complete state, the performance is not executed in accordance with the performance control mode set by the player. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation for changing the production control mode is not possible in the complete state. For example, in the first embodiment, in the complete state, depending on the operation of the production button 26, only the history code may be displayed.

In the above modification, the operation for displaying the history code in the complete state may be made easier than in the playable state. Specifically, in order to display the history code, it is necessary to operate both the performance button 26 and the direction instruction button 27 in the game ready state, while in the complete state, when the performance button 26 is operated once, the history code is displayed immediately. The configuration may be such that the is displayed. Further, a history code may be displayed on the complete image Gc. In the above configuration, the operations of the production button 26 and the direction instruction button 27 may be disabled.

Note that a technique is conventionally known that allows the language used in the gaming machine 1 (for example, the character string of the complete image Gc) to be selected via a menu image. When employing the above technique, a configuration may be adopted in which operations other than displaying the history code in the complete state are restricted, but operations for selecting a language are possible. Further, in a configuration in which the history code is displayed on the complete image Gc, a configuration may be adopted in which only the operation for selecting a language can be performed on the production button 26 and the direction instruction button 27.

(2) In each form, a configuration is adopted in which, when transitioning to the complete state, a complete screen Gc is displayed and credit medals are automatically settled. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which when transitioning to the complete state, a dedicated image notifying that medals will be automatically settled is displayed, and then a complete image Gc is displayed.

(3) In each form, the position where the advance notification image Gj is displayed is common in the abnormality stop state, setting change mode, demonstration performance mode, and door abnormality detection state. However, the position where the advance notification image Gj is displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the position where the advance notification image Gj is displayed changes between the game enabled state (see FIG. 19(a)) and the abnormal stop state (see FIG. 19(b)). According to the above configuration, the degree of freedom in the position where the advance notification image Gj is displayed is improved, and the disadvantage that the visibility of other images is reduced due to the advance notification image Gj is suppressed. Further, in the above modification, the size of the advance notification image Gj may be changed between the game enabled state and the abnormal stop state.

Similarly, the position where the advance notification image Gj is displayed may be changed between the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation image Gk is displayed (see FIG. 19(d)) and the game ready state. In the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the size of the advance notification image Gj changes between the playable state and the setting confirmation mode. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the advance notification image Gj is enlarged (reduced) in the setting confirmation mode from the playable state. Further, the position where the advance notification image Gj is displayed may be configured to change between the demonstration performance mode in which the demonstration performance image Gd is displayed (see FIG. 19(e)) and the game ready state. In the above modification, the size of the advance notification image Gj may be changed between the playable state and the demonstration production mode. For example, the prior notification image Gj may be enlarged (reduced) in the demonstration production mode from the playable state.

(4) In each form, the total number of medals (net increase) obtained in the AT state is displayed in the AT image (see FIG. 19(a) described above). In addition, the advance notification image Gj is configured to display the number of medals remaining until the complete state (see the figure). In the above configuration, the trigger for updating the number of medals in the AT image may be the same as the trigger for updating the number of medals in the advance notification image Gj. For example, based on the display winning combination command transmitted immediately after all reels 12 stop (before the payout process is executed), both the number of medals in the AT image and the number of medals in the advance notification image Gj are approximately It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are updated at the same time. The configuration in which the number of medals in the advance notification image Gj is updated by the display winning combination command described above can also be said to be a configuration in which the number of medals in the advance notification image Gj is updated before the MY counter Cmy is updated.

Further, the timing for updating may be made different between the number of medals in the AT image and the number of medals in the advance notification image Gj. For example, the number of medals in the advance notification image Gj may be updated after the payout process, while the number of medals in the AT image may be updated based on the display winning combination command immediately after all the reels 12 have stopped. According to the above configuration, compared to a configuration in which the number of medals in the AT image and the number of medals in the advance notification image Gj are updated at the same time, the number of medals displayed by each image is more freely updated. It has the advantage of improving performance.

Further, in the above configuration, it is assumed that, for example, eight bells are won in a game that transitions to a complete state. In the above configuration, the display winning combination command is received on the sub CPU 412 side before the process for transitioning to the complete state (first abnormality determination process) is executed. Therefore, there is an advantage that the notification effect to the effect that 8 bells have been won (such as displaying a message saying "Get 8 bells!") can be executed before transitioning to the complete state.

(5) In each embodiment, advance notification was performed on the liquid crystal display device 30. However, a configuration may be adopted in which advance notification is performed by a device other than the liquid crystal display device 30. FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c) are diagrams for explaining a modification example in which advance notification is performed using a device other than the liquid crystal display device 30. FIG. In the above modification, advance notification is performed on the instruction display 16.

FIG. 39(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which advance notification is performed on the instruction display 16 in a modification. FIG. 39(a) shows the state of the instruction display 16 at each time point. As will be described in detail later, the instruction display 16 is controlled to any one of the normal mode, advance notification mode (L1 to L5), standby mode L0, and complete mode CP during the non-gaming period. In the advance notification mode, the fact that the device is in the advance notification state is notified (advance notification is given). Further, FIG. 39(a) shows the state of the performance lamp 28 at each point in time.

In the specific example of FIG. 39(a), it is assumed that the normal state transitions to the advance notification state at time t1. In the above case, the instruction display 16 changes from the normal mode to the advance notification mode at time t1. During the non-gaming period controlled in the normal mode, the instruction display 16 is hidden. On the other hand, during the non-gaming period controlled by the advance notification mode, the instruction display 16 displays a character string (L1 to L5) corresponding to the number of remaining medals until the transition to the complete state.

Specifically, the instruction display 16 displays the character string "L5" when the number of medals remaining until the complete state becomes 500 or less. Further, the instruction display 16 displays the character string "L4" when the number of remaining medals until the complete state becomes 400 or less. Similarly, the instruction display 16 displays the character string "L3" when the number of medals remaining until the complete state becomes 300 or less, and when the number of medals remaining until the complete state becomes 200 or less. Then, the character string "L2" is displayed, and when the number of medals remaining until the complete state becomes 100 or less, the character string "L1" is displayed.

Immediately after transitioning to the advance notification state, the number of medals remaining until the complete state is greater than 400 and less than 500. Therefore, in the specific example of FIG. 39(a), the character string "L5" is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the period after time t1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 39(a), it is assumed that at time t2, the number of sheets remaining until the complete state becomes 400 or less. In the above case, the character string "L4" is displayed on the instruction display 16 during the period after time t2.

Similarly, in the specific example of FIG. 39(a), at time t3, the number of medals remaining until the complete state becomes 300 or less, and at time t4, the number of medals remaining until the complete state becomes 200 or less, and at the time Assume that at t5, the number of medals remaining until the complete state becomes 100 or less. In the above case, the character string "L3" is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the period after time t3, the character string "L2" is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the period after time t4, and the character string "L2" is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the period after time t4. During the period, the character string “L1” is displayed on the instruction display 16.

In this modification, when transitioning from the advance notification state to the complete state, the instruction display 16 is switched from the advance notification mode (L1) to the completion mode CP. During the period in which the instruction display 16 is controlled in the complete mode, completion notification is executed on the instruction display 16. Specifically, the instruction display 16 in the complete mode displays the character string "CP".

FIG. 39(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of when advance notification is executed on the instruction display 16 in the modified example. In the specific example of FIG. 39(a) described above, it is assumed that the player is in a state other than the bonus operation state (for example, in the internal state) at the time when the number of cards remaining until the complete state reaches 0. On the other hand, in the specific example shown in FIG. 39(b), it is assumed that the bonus is activated when the number of cards remaining until the complete state reaches 0.

In the specific example of FIG. 39(b), it is assumed that the number of medals remaining until the complete state reaches 0 at time t1 in the bonus activation state. In the above case, the instruction display 16 switches from the advance notification mode L1 to the standby mode L0. The instruction display 16 in the standby mode L0 displays the character string "L0" during the non-gaming period. In the specific example of FIG. 39(b), it is assumed that the bonus operating state ends at time t2. In the above case, at time t2, the mode of the instruction display 16 is switched from the standby mode L0 to the complete mode CP.

In the above modification, the mode of the instruction display 16 changes before and after the advance notification state starts. The above configuration can also be said to execute advance notification by the instruction display 16. Furthermore, in this modification, as shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), the aspect of the performance lamp 28 does not change before and after the advance notification state is started. As can be understood from the above explanation, in this modified example, a notification means (instruction display 16) whose notification mode changes and a notification means (direction lamp) whose notification mode does not change are provided before and after the advance notification state starts. It will be done.

By the way, assume a configuration in which the mode of the performance lamp 28 changes before and after the advance notification state is started. With the above configuration, a problem may arise in which the presentation lamp 28 looks bad during the period after the advance notification state is started. This modification has the advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed while notifying on the instruction display 16 that the pre-notification state has started.

FIG. 39(c) is a diagram for explaining details of the aspect of the instruction display 16 in the above modification. FIG. 39(c) shows the instruction display 16 at each point in time during a period extending before and after one game is executed.

Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 39(c), a game start operation is executed at time t1 and each reel 12 accelerates, and then at time t2 each reel 12 rotates steadily (stopping operation is possible). Assume that all the reels 12 are stopped at time t3 and the payout process is executed, and bet medals for starting the next game are set at time t4. Further, assume that the MY counter Cmy is added from the numerical value "18595" to the numerical value "18600" at time t4.

In the above specific example of FIG. 39(c), the character string "L5" is displayed on the instruction display 16 before time t1. During the subsequent acceleration period from time t1 to time t2, the instruction display 16 becomes non-display. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 39(c), it is assumed that instruction information "1" is displayed (the correct order of 8 bells is instructed) in the game started from time t1. In the above case, the instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction display 16 during the period from time t2 to time t3 in which the stop operation is possible.

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 39(c), it is assumed that eight bells are won at time t3. In the above case, the number "8" indicating the number of coins to be paid out is displayed on the instruction display 16 during the period from time t3 when the payout process is completed to time t4 when new bet medals are inserted. Thereafter, when the bet medal is set at time t4, the instruction display 16 displays the character string "L4". As can be understood from the above explanation, the instruction display 16 of the modified example has a function of displaying the number of coins to be paid out, a function of displaying instruction information, a function of executing advance notification, and a function of executing complete notification. do.

Note that the mode of advance notification in the segment display is not limited to the above modification. For example, a three-digit segment display may be provided separately from the instruction display 16, and the number of remaining medals (0 to 500) until the complete state is displayed on the segment display in the advance notification state. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which completion notification is executed by the segment display device. Note that in the above configuration, the segment display device may be controlled by the main CPU 301 or the sub CPU 412.

Further, the configuration for notifying (suggesting) the number of remaining medals until the complete state is not limited to the above example. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the number of remaining medals until the complete state displayed by the advance notification image Gj is updated and displayed in real time. However, instead of the above configuration, the prior notification image Gj may be updated and displayed every time the number of medals remaining until the complete state decreases by a predetermined number.

For example, the prior notification image Gj may be updated and displayed every time the number of medals remaining until the complete state decreases by 100. Specifically, in a period when the number of medals remaining until the complete state is 500 to 401, a message saying "approximately 500 medals until complete function is activated" may be displayed on the advance notification image Gj. With the above configuration, when the number of medals remaining until the complete state is 400 to 301, the message "Approximately 400 medals until the complete function activates" is displayed, and during the period when the number of remaining medals is 300 to 201, the message "Complete" is displayed. During a period when the number of remaining medals is 200 to 101, the message ``About 200 medals until the complete function is activated'' is displayed, and during a period when the number of remaining medals is 100 to 1. In this case, a message will be displayed that says ``Approximately 100 sheets until the complete function is activated.''

FIG. 39(d) is a simulated diagram of advance notification image Gjx in another modification. In this modification, the display of the advance notification image Gjx is started when the advance notification image Gjx shifts to the advance notification state. As shown in FIG. 39(d), the advance notification image Gjx includes a starting end Ts, a terminal end Te, and a moving part Tm. The moving section Tm moves between the starting end Ts and the ending end Te according to the current value of the MY counter Cmy. Furthermore, the starting end Ts side and the ending end Te side have different colors when viewed from the moving section Tm.

Specifically, when the MY counter Cmy increases (when the number of medals remaining until the complete state decreases), the moving section Tm moves toward the terminal end Te side. On the other hand, when the MY counter Cmy decreases (when the number of medals remaining until the complete state increases), the moving section Tm moves toward the starting end section Ts. When the MY counter Cmy is less than or equal to the numerical value "18500", the moving portion Tm overlaps the starting end portion Ts. When the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000", the moving part Tm overlaps the terminal part Te. In the above modification, the number of remaining medals until the complete state is suggested by the advance notification image Gjx.

FIG. 39(e) is a mock diagram of advance notification lamps (L500 to L100) in yet another modification. As shown in FIG. 39(e), the advance notification lamp includes five lamps L500 to L100. The advance notification lamp may be controlled by the main CPU 301 or the sub CPU 412.

In the above modification, all the advance notification lamps are turned off during a period when the number of medals remaining until the complete state is 500 or more. On the other hand, in a period when the number of remaining medals until the complete state is 500 to 401, one advance notification lamp (L500) is lit. Furthermore, during the period when the number of medals remaining until the complete state is 400 to 301, two advance notification lamps (L500, L400) are lit (see FIG. 39(e)). Similarly, during the period when the number of medals remaining until the complete state is 300 to 201, three advance notification lamps (L500 to L300) are lit, and during the period when the number of remaining medals until the complete state is 200 to 101, Four advance notification lamps (L500 to L200) are lit, and during a period when the number of medals remaining until the complete state is 100 to 1, five advance notification lamps (L500 to L100) are lit. In the above modification, all the advance notification lamps flash when the state shifts to the complete state.

(6) Although each embodiment includes the liquid crystal display device 30, a configuration may be adopted in which the liquid crystal display device 30 is not included. However, even in a configuration that does not include the liquid crystal display device 30, a configuration in which advance notification is performed is suitable. In consideration of the above circumstances, in a configuration that does not include the liquid crystal display device 30, for example, the modified example described using FIGS. (Modified example) may be suitably adopted. Furthermore, in a configuration that does not include the liquid crystal display device 30, a configuration in which complete notification is performed on a segment display (for example, the instruction display 16) in addition to advance notification (for example, in FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c) Modification example) is suitable.

However, in the modified example described using FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c), in a configuration that does not include the liquid crystal display device 30, the meaning of the character strings (L0 to L5, CP) on the instruction display 16 is There may be an inconvenience that people do not understand. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration in which an explanation of the meaning of the character string displayed by the instruction display 16 is displayed on the gaming machine 1 is preferable. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an explanation of the meaning of the character string displayed by the instruction display 16 is displayed on the waist panel 6. Furthermore, in a configuration that does not include the liquid crystal display device 30, it is preferable that when the state shifts to the pre-notification state, a sound is output to notify that fact.

(7) In each embodiment, the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as a "medalless machine") may be used in which electrically stored points are used as gaming media. In the above configuration, the main control board 300 is composed of a game control board for mainly controlling the progress of the game and a payout control board for mainly managing points. That is, the "main control means" of the present invention includes means constituted by one main control board 300, as well as means constituted by two pieces: a game control board and a payout control board.

In the above medalless machine, when a winning combination is won, the medals are not actually paid out, but internal points are added in the payout process. Further, when a bet operation (operation of the MAX-BET button 22) is executed, a part of the internal points (for example, 3 points) is set as a bet point. After the bet points are set, when a start operation is executed, the game starts. Further, the above internal points are stored in the usage area R1 (see FIG. 31(a)), and transferred to the management device connected to the gaming machine 1 in accordance with a predetermined payment operation. Further, when a lending operation is performed on the management device, internal points of the gaming machine 1 are added.

In the above medalless machine as well, it is preferable that the performance calculation process (S114 in FIG. 27) and the complete determination process (S115 in FIG. 27) be executed after the payout process is executed. That is, it is preferable that the MY counter Cmy is incremented when the internal points are actually added. Further, in the medalless machine, the above-mentioned payment operation can be accepted even in the complete state. However, it is preferable to disable the lending operation in the complete state. Alternatively, the internal points may be automatically transferred to the management device upon transition to the complete state. Furthermore, upon transition to the complete state, in addition to the above-mentioned security signal, a dedicated external signal indicating the transition to the complete state may be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

However, a configuration may also be adopted in which internal points can be manually transferred in the complete state. In addition, even in a medalless machine, it may be configured such that various abnormalities can be detected in the complete state, and the machine can shift to a stopped state in the event of an abnormality. For example, in the complete state, a door abnormality or a sensor abnormality may be detected, and when the abnormality is detected, the system may be configured to shift to the abnormality stop state. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which communication between the above-mentioned game control board and payout control board can be monitored and communication abnormality can be detected. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-mentioned communication abnormality is detected and the system shifts to the abnormality stop state.

(8) In each embodiment, the performance calculation process and the completion determination process (hereinafter referred to as "outside use area processing") for outside the usage area R2 are called by the calling process for the usage area R1 (see FIG. 32(a)). In the calling process of the first embodiment, immediately before calling the process outside the used area, the flag register PSW is saved in the RWM area R13 (used area R1), and immediately after the process outside the used area is finished, the flag register PSW is saved in the RWM area. It was restored from R13. However, the configuration for calling out-of-area processing is not limited to the above example.

FIG. 40(a) is a diagram for explaining call processing in a modified example. In FIG. 40(a), each process in the used area R1 and each process outside the used area R2 are shown in a distinguishable manner. The calling process of the first embodiment described above includes steps St1 to St4 (see FIG. 32(a)). In the calling process of the modified example, only the special calling of step Su1 is executed as the usage area R1.

Specifically, when the main CPU 301 starts the call process (Sc), it executes a special call (step Su1) to call the process outside the use area R2 (SI). This special call saves the current value of the flag register PSW to the stack area of the RWM area R13 and prohibits execution of interrupt processing when calling the processing outside the used area (SI).

As explained in the first embodiment, when processing outside the used area is started, the main CPU 301 saves the current value of the stack pointer SP (the value used in the used area R1) to the work area of the RWM area R23. (Sw1). Thereafter, the initial value outside the used area R2 is set to the stack pointer SP (Sw2). Further, after setting the initial value to the stack pointer SP, the current values of other internal registers (the numerical values used in the used area R1) are saved to the stack area of the RWM area R23 (Sw3). Thereafter, step Sw4 (updating MY counter Cmy, etc.) corresponding to the current out-of-use area processing is executed.

After executing step Sw4, the main CPU 301 restores the numerical value of the internal register saved in the stack area of the RWM area R23 in step Sw3 (Sw5). The main CPU 301 also restores the stack pointer PS that was saved to the work area of the RWM area 23 in step Sw1 described above (Sw6). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 returns the process to the used area R1 by executing a special return (Sw7). The special return is a process executed as an out-of-use area process. Here, when returning the process to the used area R1, the numerical value of the flag register PSW saved in the stack area of the RWM area R13 is restored to the flag register PSW as the used area process. By restoring the flag register PSW, the interrupt permission information is also restored, and the state is returned to either the interrupt permission state or the interrupt prohibition state at step Su1.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when executing the out-of-use area process, the processes from step St1 to step St4 are executed in the calling process (Sc1). In the above configuration, it is necessary to execute a plurality of processes in processing the usage area R1.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 40(a), only the special call (step Su1) is executed in the call process (Sc1) when executing the out-of-use area process. When calling a process outside the used area (SI) by a special call, the current value of the flag register PSW is saved and execution of the interrupt process is prohibited. Further, when the process is returned to the used area R1 by special restoration of the out-of-use area R2, the flag register PSW is restored. Therefore, there is an advantage that the number of processes executed in the usage area R1 can be reduced, and the program in the usage area R1 can be made smaller.

In addition, in the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the interrupt permission information is not included in the flag register. In the above configuration, a step (for example, St2 in FIG. 32(a)) that prohibits interrupt processing when calling a process outside the used area in the calling process is provided, and when returning to the used area process, interrupt processing is enabled. Provide steps to do so. Similarly, in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 32(a)), the interrupt permission information may not be included in the flag register. In the above configuration, a step of permitting interrupt processing is provided when returning to the used area processing.

FIG. 40(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the program XXXX stored in the usage area R1 (control area R12). The above program XXXX is a call processing program in a modified example. As understood from FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b-1), only one instruction "CALLI" is executed in the calling process of the modified example.

FIG. 40(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the program YYYY stored in the usage area R2 (control area R22). The above program YYYY is a program for processing outside the used area that is called in the calling process of the modified example. As described above, the process called in the call process of the modified example includes steps Sw1 to Sw7. FIG. 40(b-2) shows step Sw4 of the above steps S omitted.

(9) In each form, we have adopted a configuration in which medals are automatically settled upon transition to the complete state. In the above configuration, when transitioning to the complete state, it may be configured to notify that medals will be automatically settled (hereinafter referred to as "settlement notification"). In the settlement notification, for example, a voice saying "Medals will be automatically settled" is output, and an image (hereinafter referred to as "settlement image") displaying a message to that effect is displayed. In the above configuration, the settlement notification may be executed prior to (priority to) the completion notification. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the settlement notification is executed after the completion notification is executed.

Further, it may be configured such that medals are not automatically settled upon transition to the complete state, and medal settlement operations can be accepted in the subsequent complete state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that in the complete state, a notification to the effect that medals should be paid manually is executed. For example, it is preferable to output a voice saying "please settle the medals" and display an image displaying a message to that effect in the complete state. As understood from the above description, the "processing related to payment of gaming value" of the present invention includes processing for executing payment and processing for executing notification regarding payment.

Further, the mode of settlement notification may be different depending on whether the medals are paid out in the complete state and the case where the medals are paid out in the playable state. For example, in a configuration where a voice saying "Medals will be automatically settled" is output when medals are automatically settled in the complete state, a warning sound is output when medals are settled in the playable state. Good too. Furthermore, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned payment image is displayed when medals are automatically paid out in the complete state, a special image may not be displayed when medals are paid out in the playable state. Further, in the above configuration, when the medals are paid out in the playable state, it may be configured to switch to the demonstration effect image.

(10) In each form, each piece of information including the game status flag, ball output status flag, and complete flag Fc was initialized when the setting change process was completed. Instead of the above configuration, the above information may be initialized at the time the setting change process is started. Further, the configuration may be such that the process for initializing each of the above information is executed both at the start and at the end of the setting change process.

(11) In each embodiment, the trigger for executing the complete notification may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the timing for completing notification is the same when transitioning from the advance notification state to the complete state and when transitioning from the standby state to the complete state. It may be different depending on the case. Specifically, when transitioning from advance notification state to complete state, completion notification is started at the moment of transition to complete state, while when transitioning from standby state to complete state, completion notification is started from the end wait of bonus activation state. A configuration may be adopted in which notification is started.

(12) In each embodiment, the MY counter Cmy and advance notification flag Fj are not referenced in the lottery processing (AT lottery, etc.) on the main CPU 301 side. That is, the lottery process on the main CPU 301 side is configured not to change depending on the number of medals remaining until the complete state and whether or not the state is in the advance notification state. In the above configuration, the processing on the sub CPU 412 side may be configured to change depending on the number of medals remaining until the complete state and whether or not the state is in the advance notification state.

Specifically, the frequency at which the performance is performed may be changed before and after transitioning to the advance notification state. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the frequency of presentation is lowered in the advance notification state than in the normal state. Further, the type of performance that can be executed may be configured to change between the normal state and the advance notification state. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration can be considered in which an additional effect for the number of remaining games in the AT state is executed in the normal state but not in the advance notification state (however, the additional lottery itself is executed by the main CPU 301). Further, in the advance notification state, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition is made to a special effect mode in which a special effect is executed.

(13) In each form, it may be possible to check the history of transition to the pre-notification state and the history of transition to the complete state. For example, assume a configuration in which a system screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 when the production button 26 and the direction designation button 27 are operated appropriately in the setting confirmation mode. The above system screen displays the history of transition to advance notification state (〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇) and the history of transition to complete state. For example, the year, month, day, hour and minute of the transition to the advance notification state and the year, month, day, hour and minute of the transition to the complete state are each displayed for a plurality of times (for example, 100 times). Similarly, the above system screen may be configured to display a history of transitions to setting change mode, a history of power-offs, a history of clear operations, and a history of detected abnormalities. paragraph

In the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the system screen can be displayed in the advance notification state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the advance notification image Gj is hidden when the system screen is displayed in the advance notification state. According to the above configuration, the inconvenience that each piece of information on the system screen becomes difficult to visually recognize in the advance notification image Gj is suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the advance notification image Gj is displayed on the system screen. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the system screen can be displayed in the complete state. In the above configuration, the complete notification may be executed on the system screen, or the complete notification may not be executed on the system screen.

(14) In the first embodiment described above, the advance notification image Gj is hidden in the abnormal stop state when the first abnormality (hopper empty) occurs, and the advance notification image Gj is hidden when the second abnormality (sensor abnormality) occurs. The advance notification image Gj was displayed in the time stop state (see FIG. 19(b) and FIG. 19(f)). In the above configuration, the first abnormality and the second abnormality can be set as appropriate. For example, the above set value abnormality may be the first abnormality. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the advance notification image Gj is not displayed in the abnormal stop state when a set value abnormality occurs. Similarly, the RAM abnormality may be the first abnormality.

(15) In each embodiment, the standby state may be omitted. Specifically, the configuration may be such that when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000", the system immediately shifts to the complete state, regardless of whether or not the bonus is activated. Further, in the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the bonus in-progress signal (external signal) is changed to the ON state in the bonus operating state. Further, when the above configuration is adopted, the bonus in-progress signal may be changed from the ON state to the OFF state when the bonus operation state shifts to the complete state. However, when adopting the above configuration, it is preferable that the gaming status flag is maintained in the bonus activation status after the completion status is started.

(16) In each form, specific examples of "predetermined controls" that can be executed in the complete state include abnormality-related processing, external output processing, setting confirmation processing, menu-related processing (see Figure 16 above), and completion notification. I explained the process to do this. However, the "predetermined control" of the present invention is not limited to the above example.

(17) In each form, a menu image is displayed during the non-gaming period, and various operations can be accepted via the menu image. Furthermore, for example, a volume adjustment image for adjusting the master volume can be displayed via the menu image. Similarly, the history image that displays the history code can be displayed via the menu image. In the above configuration, advance notification may be performed in the menu image. Specifically, the prior notification image Gj may be displayed on the menu image. Further, in the above configuration, the prior notification image Gj may be displayed on the volume adjustment image, or the prior notification image Gj may be displayed on the history image.

The prior notification image Gj may be temporarily hidden when the menu image is displayed. However, with the above configuration, if the menu image is left displayed, a new player may start playing the game without knowing that it is in the advance notification state. In consideration of the above circumstances, in a configuration in which the advance notification image Gj is temporarily hidden when the menu image is displayed, the menu image will be demodulated if the production button 26 or the direction designation button 27 is not operated for a certain period of time or more. A configuration in which the image can be switched to a performance image or an in-game image (that is, an image in which the advance notification image Gj is displayed) is preferable. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

(18) In each form, the configuration is such that it is possible to transition from the complete state to the abnormal stop state. Specifically, an abnormality determination process (hereinafter referred to as "third abnormality determination process") is repeatedly executed in the complete state. In the third abnormality determination process described above, the state of each abnormality detection flag is determined. Further, in the third abnormality determination process described above, when the abnormality detection flag Fe1 is in the ON state, the complete state is shifted to the abnormality stop state.

In the above configuration, the program for the third abnormality determination process may be stored in the RWM area R13 of the usage area R1, similarly to the program for the first abnormality determination process and the program for the second abnormality determination process. Further, the program for the third abnormality determination process may be stored in the RWM area R23 of the usage area R2.

(19) In each embodiment, the information stored in the usage area R1 and the information stored in the usage area R2 may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first embodiment, both the performance calculation processing program and the completion determination processing program are stored in the outside use area R2. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the programs is stored in the usage area R1 and the other is stored outside the usage area R2. Alternatively, both of the programs may be stored in the usage area R1.

(20) In each embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a freeze period can be provided when all the reels 12 are stopped. For example, a configuration may be considered in which a freeze period is provided when all reels 12 stop in the final game in the AT state. During the freeze period, for example, the number of medals acquired in the current AT state is displayed. Specifically, the freeze period starts after the payout process for the final game in the AT state is completed and the MY counter Cmy is incremented.

Further, in the above modification, when the MY counter Cmy reaches the threshold value "19000" in the final game in the AT state, it is preferable that a freeze period is provided before shifting to the complete state. In addition, in the game transitioning to the complete state, the prior notification image Gj may be displayed or hidden during the freeze period. However, in a configuration in which the advance notification image Gj is displayed during the freeze period, a configuration in which the advance notification image Gj can display during the freeze period that the number of medals remaining until the complete state is 0 is suitable. Note that the configuration in which the freeze period is provided is not limited to the final game in the AT state.

(21) In each embodiment, the MY counter Cmy and advance notification flag Fj are initialized when the power is turned OFF/ON. However, a configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj when the power is turned OFF/ON. For example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether a predetermined maintenance condition is met, and if the maintenance condition is met, the MY counter Cmy and advance notification flag Fj are initialized, and the maintenance condition is A configuration is conceivable in which each piece of information is not initialized when the following is not established.

As a modification of the above, for example, a configuration may be considered in which a maintenance button that can be operated by an administrator is provided inside the gaming machine 1. In the above configuration, the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are initialized when the sustain button is operated when the power is turned on, and each information is not initialized when the maintain button is not operated.

Further, as a modification of the above, for example, a configuration may be considered in which, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether a certain period of time (hereinafter referred to as the "maintenance period") has elapsed since the power was turned off. . In the above configuration, when the power is turned on and the maintenance period has elapsed, the MY counter Cmy and the advance notification flag Fj are initialized, and when the maintenance period has not elapsed, each information is not initialized. The above configuration has the advantage that, for example, even if the power is accidentally cut off during the operating period of the game parlor, the advance notification state can be maintained by immediately turning on the power again.

(22) In each form, the MY counter Cmy was updated at the time the payout process was completed. However, the MY counter Cmy may be updated at the time when the scheduled payout number is stored in the display determination process. That is, the MY counter Cm may be updated before the payout process.

(23) In each form, the timing at which the number of medals displayed in the advance notification image Gj (hereinafter referred to as the "number of displayed medals") is updated can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of displayed medals may be updated at a time other than when the MY counter Cmy is updated (immediately after the end of the payout process). For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a numerical value corresponding to the bet medals is added to the number of displayed medals when a game is started. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the payout number (scheduled payout number) of the winning combination indicated by the display winning combination command may be subtracted from the display medal number when the display winning combination command is received. The above configuration has the advantage that it becomes easy to understand that the MY counter Cmy is updated in accordance with both the number of bet medals and the number of paid out medals.

(24) In each type of bonus operation state, a common bonus image Gb is displayed in the normal state, advance notification state, and standby state (see FIG. 17(d)). Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the bonus image Gb is switched to another image (hereinafter referred to as "standby state image") upon transition to the standby state. In the above standby state image, it is reported that the device is in the standby state.

By the way, in the above-mentioned bonus image Gb, various images (animation, etc.) suggesting (notifying) the results of the instruction function related processing are displayed. However, as soon as the bonus operating state ends, the standby state shifts to the complete state. Therefore, it is assumed that the benefits (such as the right to shift to the AT state) obtained through instruction function-related processing in the standby state may be substantially invalidated. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable that the standby state image does not display an image that suggests the result of the instruction function-related process. As the above standby state image, for example, a predetermined still image (including a monochromatic background image) can be considered.

(25) In each embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the light amount value of the production lamp 28 and the like can be adjusted via the menu image. With the above configuration, the light amount value can be changed in addition to the master volume during the non-gaming period. Further, in the above modification example, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation of adjusting the master volume and the operation of adjusting the light amount value are disabled in the complete state. However, the configuration may be such that each of the above operations can be performed in the complete state.

(26) In each form, each piece of information initialized by the clearing process can be changed as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which each piece of information that is initialized in the clearing process and each piece of information that is initialized in the setting change process are the same, except that the setting value is not cleared. In the above configuration, the complete state is canceled by clearing processing. In addition, in the above configuration, when a clear operation is executed while the error detection flag Fer (RAM error) is ON, full initialization processing is executed in the same way as when a setting change operation is executed. Good too.

(27) The present invention can be applied not only to the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine, but also to pachinko machines, other game machines, and game machines in general. It goes without saying that the control in each of the above modifications can be executed regardless of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a first storage area that stores a first control program that is a gaming control program for controlling the progress of a game, and a second storage area that stores a second control program that is different from the gaming control program. a first storage area that is referenced and updated by the first control program and not updated by the second control program; and a second storage area that is referenced and updated by the second control program but not updated by the first control program. A storage area, a main control means (main control board 300) capable of executing a first control program, and a second control program, and a system for displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner in each game, and a symbol combination as a result of the game. This gaming machine is equipped with symbol display means (each reel 12) that stops and displays a symbol, and a stop operation means (stop button 25) that is stopped by a player, and the main control means is a first control program. Through the processing, game start control that starts a game using game value, winning area determination control (internal lottery processing) that determines one of multiple types of winning areas, and modes of winning area and stop operation. Accordingly, symbol fluctuation control (stop control processing) that stops and displays the symbol combinations, gaming value imparting control (payout processing) that makes it possible to award the gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination, and symbol combinations for replaying are stopped and displayed. Then, it is possible to execute replay setting control (automatic input processing) that allows the next game to be started without using the game value, and game stop control that moves the gaming machine to a stopped state where it is impossible to play. Yes, through the processing of the second control program, the specific information (MY counter Cmy) stored in the second storage area is stored in the symbols according to the gaming value used and the gaming value given in each game . Update control that can be updated after the association is stopped and displayed (complete determination process), determination control that executes a determination process that determines whether specific information has reached a predetermined threshold, and When it is determined that the gaming machine has reached the stopped state, it is possible to execute a stop flag storage control that stores a stop flag that triggers the gaming machine to enter the stopped state in the second storage area, and the update control is a stop flag storage control that stores a stop flag that triggers the gaming machine to enter the stopped state. The symbol combination is executed in a game other than the game in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol combination in the replay is omitted in the game in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the determination control is executed in the game in which the symbol combination in the replay is not displayed in the stop display. On the other hand, symbol combinations for re- gaming are omitted in games where they are displayed in a stopped state. 2 control program, executes the process of the second control program, executes update control, determination control, and stop flag storage control by the process of the second control program, returns to the first control program, and executes the process of the second control program. If the stop flag is stored, the game stop control is executed, and if a predetermined initialization condition is met, the first control program is executed, and then the first control program stores the game in the second storage area. A stored second control program is called, the stop flag in the second storage area is initialized by the second control program, and if the initialization condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the first control program is executed, and then , the first control program calls the second control program stored in the second storage area, and the second control program initializes the specific information in the second storage area, while maintaining the stop flag. Features.

1... Gaming machine, 300... Main control board, 301... Main CPU, 302... Main ROM, 303... Main RAM, 304... Random number generator, 305... I/F circuit, 400... Sub control board, 410... Performance control board , 411... I/F circuit, 412... Sub CPU, 413... Sub ROM, 414... Sub RAM, 420... Image control board, 421... Image control CPU, 422... Image control ROM, 423... VDP, 424... CGROM, 425 ...RAM, 430...sound board, 431...sound source IC, 432...sound source ROM.

Claims (1)

a first storage area for storing a first control program serving as a game control program for controlling the progress of the game;
a second storage area that stores a second control program different from the game control program;
a first storage area that is referenced and updated by the first control program and not updated by the second control program;
a second storage area that is referenced and updated by the second control program and not updated by the first control program;
a main control means capable of executing the first control program and the second control program;
In each game, a symbol display means variably displays a plurality of types of symbols and stops displaying a symbol combination as a result of the game;
A gaming machine comprising a stop operation means that is operated by a player to stop the game,
The main control means is
Through the processing of the first control program,
game start control for starting a game using game value;
Winning area determination control for determining one of multiple types of winning areas;
symbol variation control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination according to the winning area and the mode of the stopping operation;
a gaming value imparting control that makes it possible to impart a gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination;
a replay setting control that enables the next game to be started without using the game value when the symbol combination for replay is stopped and displayed;
A game stop control that moves the game machine to a stopped state in which it is impossible to play,
Through the processing of the second control program,
In each game, the specific information stored in the second storage area can be updated according to the used gaming value and the assigned gaming value after the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. ,
determination control that executes determination processing to determine whether the specific information has reached a predetermined threshold;
When it is determined that the specific information has reached the threshold value , it is possible to perform stop flag storage control for storing a stop flag that triggers the gaming machine to enter the stopped state in the second storage area. ,
The update control is executed in a game other than a game in which the symbol combination for replay is stopped and displayed, and is omitted in a game in which the symbol combination for replay is stopped and displayed,
The determination control is executed in a game other than a game in which the symbol combination in a re-game is displayed in a stopped state, while it is omitted in a game in which the symbol combination in a re-game is displayed in a stopped state ,
After the gaming value granting control is performed by the processing of the first control program, the second control program stored in the second storage area is called by the first control program, and the processing of the second control program is performed. Run
Returning to the first control program after executing the update control, the determination control, and the stop flag storage control by the processing of the second control program,
The first control program executes the game stop control when the stop flag is stored,
When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the first control program is executed, and then the first control program calls the second control program stored in the second storage area, and the second control program is executed. initializing the stop flag in the second storage area by a control program;
If the initialization condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the first control program is executed, and then the first control program calls the second control program stored in the second storage area, and the first control program executes the first control program. 2 control program initializes the specific information in the second storage area while maintaining the stop flag.
Game machine.

Images